JP2021122596A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game when executing a performance that uses vibration.SOLUTION: A game machine is set such that a specific interlocking performance is executable following a specific performance, such as movable body operation, image display, and music piece reproduction, in a ready-to-win performance of an SP ready-to-win A. In the specific interlocking performance, a particular vibration performance by one of vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 is executable. A vibration mode differs between a particular vibration performance by one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and a vibration performance by a vibration pattern in an operation part performance. Jackpot reliability in execution of the operation part performance is one of 50% or higher, 70% or higher, and 100% according to an operation part performance pattern. For a ready-to-win performance of an SP ready-to-win A, for example jackpot reliability is about 40%.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12-2

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a technique of providing a vibrating means on a hitting ball launching handle has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-38019

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in improving the interest of the production by vibration.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming when performing an effect by vibration.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
An operating means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and that can be operated by the player. ), And as the vibration effect that the operating means vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, vibration included in the variable display effect control pattern). Variable in step S172 using vibration control execution means (for example, operation unit effect control pattern or variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute vibration motor 131 with control data. A light emitting effect (for example, a light emitting effect of the lever lamp 9B1 and a button lamp 9B2 according to the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect effect processing during display. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) and the light emission effect execution means (such as). Based on a specific effect execution means (for example, a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172, and a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5). When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like), and the predetermined vibration effect is achieved. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the operation unit effect pattern). The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the predetermined vibration. The vibration mode differs between the effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration pattern A). Vibration patterns different from KV41 to AKV44, such as AKV01 to AKV03), the display area of the display means is a first display area and a second area around the first display area, which is narrower than the first display area. The display area includes a display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 has a second display device 5). 1 display area 20SH51 and 2nd display area 20SH52 can display a background image corresponding to a jackpot game state, etc.), and in the 2nd display area, a game is provided on the front side of the background image. It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the value grant amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the granted prize balls number on the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52. At least in the first display area, the amount of the game value given is the first as a notification display notifying that the amount of the game value given has reached a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. 1 It is possible to display a first notification display for notifying that a predetermined amount has been reached and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, image display). The device 5 is a jackpot as a jackpot notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. When the number of prize balls given in the game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state is "2000". (For example, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over" when the value is reached), and the grant amount display is updated every time the game value is granted in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number). The display 20SHK is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), and the notification display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display (for example, the display ends. The acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display. The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKK are used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, acquisition). The characters used in the number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.), and the specific characters used in the grant amount display are described above. The background image is invisible from the specific area (for example, the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible from the specific area, etc.), and the specific character used in the notification display is The background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH are visible from the specific area, etc.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. In addition, a display including specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-17403, an amount of granting amount of a gaming value granted in an advantageous state favorable to a player and a granting of a gaming value are provided. There was a notification display for notifying that the amount reached a predetermined amount, and a display capable of displaying. In such a gaming machine, for example, a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed is used for various displays such as a grant amount display and a notification display, and for example, an advantageous state is used. Although the background image corresponding to various states is displayed, there is room for improvement in the relationship between the specific character and the background image, and in view of this point, the display including the specific character is suitable in relation to the background image. It is required to provide a gaming machine that can be displayed on the screen.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and the display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an image display). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 has a first display area). In the 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, the background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed, etc.), and in the second display area, the added gaming value is given to the front side of the background image. The grant amount display regarding the amount can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52. Etc.), at least in the first display area, the amount of the game value given is the first predetermined amount as a notification display notifying that the amount of the game value given has reached the predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. It is possible to display a first notification display for notifying that the player has reached the second predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of the gaming value given has reached the second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display the image display device 5). In the jackpot gaming state, at least in the first display area 20SH51, as the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state has reached the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the background image. When the number of prize balls given reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached "2000". Sometimes, the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over" can be displayed), and the grant amount display is updated every time the gaming value is granted in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK is , It is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the big hit game state), the notification display is specified after the display is started. The display ends when the period elapses (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period elapses after the display starts), and the characters used for the notification display are It is a character having a size larger than the character used for the grant amount display (for example, the character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKK is a character having a size larger than the character used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.). The characters used in the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). Does include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed), and the background image of the specific character used for the given amount display is invisible from the specific area ( For example, the background image of the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible from the specific area, etc.), and the background image of the specific character used in the notification display is visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH has a background image that can be visually recognized from a specific area, etc.).
According to such a configuration, a display including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example and setting example about a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a vibration effect and an example of a jackpot reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing and the effect period of a vibration effect and a line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect device about the feature part 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the setting example at the time of executing the operation part effect pattern and the specific interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the continuous effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the timing which can execute the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the effect which makes a game effect lamp emit light. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the effect period which can execute a specific interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the music reproduction execution example. It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of the state which a game ball is sandwiched by a special variable winning ball device. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows the background technique which concerns on the 1st form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number display, etc. in the 1st form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the acquisition number display in the 1st form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the 1st form of the feature unit 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the result display in the 3rd form of a feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production period of various effects in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of various effects in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the ending background image in the 3rd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the background technique which concerns on the 4th form of a feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number notification display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the remaining number display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change of the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect operation when a prize occurs during a round in a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers which display various displays in a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect operation when the over prize is generated in the feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers which display various displays in a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the over-winning effect in the feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect operation when there is a round which did not win a predetermined number and a round where an over prize occurred in the feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect operation when there is a round which did not win a predetermined number and a round where an over prize occurred in the feature part 19SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like is provided to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the first and second major winning openings (attackers) occupy. It is a ratio. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of the power supply monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the display result for the first special figure regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In this feature unit, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step S202. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step S204). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and the other hold numbers "2" to "2" are deleted. The hold display in the display area corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of pending memories is "0", the active display area is not updated without updating the hold display. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is used in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a big hit where the variable display result is a "big hit", the final stop symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit.

At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 are the highest. As a result, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 As the number becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol becomes higher, and the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, and 6 As the number becomes the number of, 5 number, 4 number, 3 number, and 2 number, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is low. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is the lowest. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". The number of determination values assigned to each decorative symbol to be a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step S225). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is determined (step S226). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-3 shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 10-3 as the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". ..

FIG. 10-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion contents of these setting suggestion patterns differ depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 10-4 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 10-4 (B) as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11 or the like. In the determination table TA11, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode of 7. It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continuously provided, and the suggestions regarding the set value will be provided.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. The production mode by any production device, such as a combination of a part or all of them, may be changed. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data obtained by combining these are predetermined for executing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies one or more conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). In the case of the advance notice effect period (step S242; Yes), the control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step S243). When it is not the advance notice effect period (step S242; No), or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step S244). In the case of the reach effect period (step S244; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step S245). When the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by the control of step S245 and then the reach effect after the symbol display color is changed is executed, a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is given, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. Can make suggestions regarding set values.

When it is not the reach effect period (step S244; No), or after the control of step S245 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be predetermined as an execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. In the case of the change effect period (step S246; Yes), the control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). When it is not the change effect period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern, the decorative pattern can be changed. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even in unfavorable cases (unfavorable productions), since the motivation for shooting is not motivated, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. As a result, when an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it, and it is possible to secure a shooting time. In addition, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the players on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko game machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. In this way, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display effect process is terminated.

FIG. 10-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. When the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", the reach is established and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 10-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102, which is a reach development in which the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. The effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is displayed as stopped. In addition, by displaying an effect image for notifying a message such as "change the symbol display color !!", it is suggested to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 10-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 10-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 10-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 10-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the reach pattern is not changed by the pattern RE-0, and is not changed as the normal display color of red. In this way, the failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper by the pattern RE-1, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. In the effect execution example HD113, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2, which suggests that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3, which suggests the determination of 6, which is the highest set value.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. When executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of giving a suggestion regarding the set value of the gaming machine 1. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the suggestion of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the enjoyment of pachinko.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round, etc.). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state for the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may give a suggestion regarding a probabilistic state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature 10SH)
Next, the feature portion 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes an operating means that can be operated by the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has higher jackpot reliability when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, a timing T2 at which the reach is established, and a normal reach after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timing T3 during which the reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has the push button 31B regardless of whether the timing is one of the timing T1 and the timing T2 or the timing of the timing T3 and the timing T4. The vibration effect can be performed in a manner in which the vibration time and the emission color are common.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of the super reach.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various effects images.

The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect related to the feature unit 10SH has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the effect image of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the always small symbol, the number of hold display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the hold display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative symbol.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 10SH, and shows the layout of the main members.

The push button 31B is formed of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for a game effect is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to be vibrable by driving the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is composed of, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight having a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or at a position close to the push button 31B. In addition, in order to make the vibration mode of the push button 31B various, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L and 9R have a plurality of LEDs built in along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on / off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, 9R, drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, 9R based on the lamp signal, and has a game effect in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn on / off the lamps 9B, 9L, 9R. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp. The lighting / extinguishing control of the lamp may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a motor control board 130. The display control unit 123 supplies the motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process related to the feature unit 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display variation pattern to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). The variation pattern and the display result are transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display and are specified by the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery refers to a determination method using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. As the random number value, one of the effect random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random number update process is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration effect is executed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect that is not linked to the advance notice effect. In the process of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration effect is executed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed by drawing a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. The determination value to be compared with the random value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence / absence of the vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is, for example, (probability that effect A is executed when the display result is "big hit") x (probability that the display result is "big hit") / {(display result). Probability that effect A is executed when is a "big hit") x (probability that the display result is a "big hit") + (probability that effect A is executed when the display result is not a "big hit") x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "big hit")}.

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is performed when the display result becomes "big hit" so that the jackpot reliability corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value. It suffices to specify the probability of execution and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern is executed when the display result does not become a "big hit".

(Contents of vibration production and jackpot reliability)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the jackpot. In the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, the execution patterns SE1 to the execution patterns SE1 to the combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of vibration effects of SE10.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment has a timing T3 that is executing a normal reach reach effect and a timing T4 that is executing a super reach reach effect after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as the vibration effect at the timing T3 during the execution of the reach effect of the normal reach. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect may be executed when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, or the super reach reach effect. Regardless of the timing T4, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted. It is possible to carry out a vibration effect in which the light is emitted in red. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. Is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit red light. Is.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Vibration production can be performed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors. It is possible.

Then, in this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds as compared with the case where the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light is executed. The jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in red is executed. Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is "big hit". Is definitely notified.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, it is possible to pay attention to what color the push button 31B emits light and how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed, and when the push button 31B is vibrated and pushed for 3 seconds. When the vibration effect in which the button 31B emits light in red is executed, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even in the case of the vibration effect of the same aspect, when the normal reach reach effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is executed more than when it is executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed. The jackpot reliability is high. Further, even in the vibration effect of the same aspect, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed at the timing T4 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is executed at the timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. , The jackpot reliability is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode when the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1, the reach effect of the super reach is performed instead of the timing T3 during which the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed. It is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during execution. Then, when the vibration effect is not actually executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed, the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed is further increased. be able to.

The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during which the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Further, when a plurality of types of normal reach reach effects can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach effects, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects that can be executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effects are being executed is , It suffices if it is higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of the normal reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of any kind of normal reach.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the super reach. Further, when a plurality of types of super reach reach effects can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of super reach reach effect, the jackpot of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. The reliability may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of the super reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of any kind of super reach.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect can be regarded as a chance-up effect. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is always vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored vibration effect. It is definitely notified that the display result will be a "big hit".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, not at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, when the vibration effect is not actually executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established can be further increased.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the expectation that the vibration effect is executed in a complicated manner as the variable display of the decorative pattern progresses.

Further, the probability that the vibration effect of the mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is sufficiently low as compared with the probability that the vibration effect of the other mode is executed. By prescribing it, it is possible to enhance the interest when it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "big hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always made to emit light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and it is possible to increase the chance of recognizing that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the description of FIG. 11-3, after that, according to the determination result of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 performs the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the super reach reach effect in the variable display this time. It is determined whether or not to execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T4 during execution (step 10SHS3).

Then, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance effect is an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect by a random number value and a lottery using a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of the vibration effect is executed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect at the same ratio regardless of which mode the vibration effect is.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In addition, it is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect.

According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be focused on before the vibration effect is executed, so that the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

On the other hand, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established, the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, the relief effect may be executed after the display result of "off" is displayed, and the true display result may be derived and displayed. Therefore, when the display result of the previous variable display is derived and displayed and the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started even though the variable display of this time is started, There is a possibility of giving a misunderstanding as if the relief effect was executed in the previous variable display. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is possible to prevent such a misunderstanding.

Further, if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol has become the predetermined reach mode. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol has become the predetermined reach mode. ..

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, when the vibration effect is not executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed ( After executing the process of step 10SHS3; No) or step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as reach effect, the mode of the effect to be executed, and the like (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the mode thereof are determined by lottery. At this time, by making the decision ratio in the lottery different according to the display result of this time, the fluctuation pattern of this time, etc., the jackpot reliability is made different depending on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and its mode. Further, when the current pattern specifies the reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern is executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the effect determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the current variation pattern as an initial value in the effect control process timer, and the type and mode of the effect determined to be executed. The effect specific data that specifies the effect and the execution timing specific timer value that indicates the effect execution timing by comparing with the timer value of the effect control process timer are stored in the timer value storage area of the RAM 122 in association with each other. When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specific data and the execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol that derives the determined final stop symbol and the mode specified by the variation pattern this time (10SHS7). Upon receiving the instruction, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

(Execution timing and production period of vibration production and line-of-sight guidance production)
FIG. 11-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and the effect period of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. It is possible.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In that case, the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed before that.

When the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 starts the line-of-sight guidance effect 4 seconds before the timing T3. , When the timing T3 is reached, the vibration effect is started. Similarly, when the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance is performed 4 seconds before the timing T4. The production is started, and the vibration production is started when the timing T4 is reached. The production period of the line-of-sight guidance effect of this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed for the first second.

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, so that the effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. In this effect operation example, an example in which the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of super reach reach effects. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), the background image 10SHY of the "mountain landscape" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed when the reach is established is reduced and displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L when the reach is established. And, when the reach is established, the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R, which is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, is displayed.

Further, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 10SHK smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" is provided. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, the variable display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The effect image showing a small pattern is also called a broadcast information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol to be the broadcast information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol to be the display result is displayed. Derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small symbol different from the decorative symbol is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that will be the display result, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously performed in a certain display mode, and disappears from the screen or is obstructed. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK is also referred to as a constant small symbol or a small symbol for directing. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, for example, a plurality of decorative symbols that can be identified in a display mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbols are common to each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols, such as a symbol that indicates a number as well as a part that indicates a number in the decorative symbol. An effect image showing a type of small symbol may be variably displayed as a broadcast information image. The small symbol may be displayed only when the decorative symbol is hidden. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode, the variable display of the small symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A) instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It may be displayed in the lower left corner of.

A special symbol, a decorative symbol, and a fourth symbol following the normal symbol are provided, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. In the variable display of the fourth symbol, for example, in the fourth symbol display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5, display and non-display are repeated at regular time intervals with a specific display color. It is realized by continuing the display control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are different from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Is provided at a remote position. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the display result is inside and whether or not the display result is derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, whether or not the variable display is in progress is determined. Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, in this example, the hold display area 10SHH for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held, and the active display area 10SH for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution. , Is displayed. When the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the hold display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SH may not be displayed.

Further, a hold number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the hold number display area 10SHHS, as in the hold display area 10SHH, the hold number of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. The display mode is a mode in which arithmetic numbers are displayed.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect 4 seconds before the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual effect as the line-of-sight guidance effect.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). do.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B) to 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings up the hammer. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B) to 11-6 (D) in accordance with the action of the character swinging up the hammer. Light the light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (E) and 11-7 (F). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (E) and 11-7 (F) in accordance with the action of the character swinging down the hammer. Light the light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of hammers that the character swings down hit the button image 10SHB and imitates a star from the button image 10SHB at the timing T4. The mode of various images is changed so that the effect image 10SHS of the "star" of the above is scattered. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 starts the vibration effect when the timing T4 is reached, vibrates the push button 31B, and is built in the push button 31B. The game effect lamps 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after the timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the line-of-sight guidance effect as shown in FIG. 11-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect elapses, the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration effect, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and has a game effect lamp built in the push button 31B. 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as below the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B, and whether the push button 31B is vibrating or whether the push button 31B is lit. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not. On the other hand, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, the push button 31B can be focused on before the push button 31B vibrates, and the push button 31B can be pushed. The vibration of the button 31B can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

It should be noted that the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is always set lower than that of the small symbol or the number of hold display. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guidance effect on the layer on the back side of the layer that always displays the small symbol or the number of hold display among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the back side of the constant small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, always has a lower priority than the small symbol.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the back side of the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the guidance effect, has a lower priority than the hold number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set higher than that of the hold display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guidance effect on the layer on the front side of the layer for displaying the background image or the decorative pattern among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB are displayed on the front side of the background image 10SHY of the "mountain landscape". It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are the displays of the line-of-sight guidance effect, have higher priority than the background image 10SHY of the "mountain scenery".

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed on the front side of the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is a display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the front side of the "left" reach decoration symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration symbol 10SH5R. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the reach decorative symbol 10SH5L of the "left" and the reach decorative symbol 10SH5R of the "right".

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the front side of the hold display displayed in the hold display area 10SHH, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, has a higher priority than the hold display.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the front side of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while preferably ensuring the visibility of the small symbol and the number of hold display at all times.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed and the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed. The high-priority constant small symbols and the number of pending displays are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made more conspicuous while ensuring the visibility of the small symbol and the holding number display at all times. ..

(Modification example of feature part 10SH)
The invention according to the feature portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 of FIG. 11-3, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be set according to which mode of the vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 is either a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, or the push button 31B is pressed for 3 seconds. Depending on whether the vibration effect is such that the push button 31B is vibrated over a period of 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in red, or the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow color. The presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be determined at different ratios. Here, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit red light is executed, it is easy to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect. Further, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is always executed. That is, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect having higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the expectation that the vibration effect with higher jackpot reliability is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with the advance notice effect. In this case, as the vibration effect linked with the notice effect, there are a plurality of types depending on the combination of the interlocking notice effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. It may be possible to carry out the vibration effect of. Depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the accessory advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect linked with the highly reliable character advance notice effect. This vibration effect is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the interlocking accessory notice effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as a chance-up effect in the character advance notice effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with other highly reliable advance notice effects. This vibration effect is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the notice effect and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the interlocking notice effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as an effect of increasing the chance in the advance notice effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived, the gaming ball passes through a specific area provided in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or a winning opening. By doing so, the jackpot gaming state may be started. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery effect that notifies the maximum number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball that has passed through a specific area is detected. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect. This vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery effect, and is executed in the jackpot game state. Notify that the maximum number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among a plurality of options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored effect, thereby performing a big hit. It may be definitively notified that the maximum number of rounds executed in the game state is the maximum number of rounds among the plurality of options. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise attention to the vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11 or when an error is detected in the effect control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting the error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance effect. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error notification image can be suitably ensured even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed when the error notification image is displayed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. For example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the time. Further, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. , It is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between a timing before the reference timing and a timing after the reference timing with reference to a certain timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol, which is the timing before the timing T2, is started with the timing T2 at which the reach is established as a reference. , The timing T3 during the normal reach reach production, which is the timing after the timing T2, and the timing T4 during the super reach reach production are set to 3 seconds. The vibration time at the timing after the reference timing may be longer than the vibration time at the timing before the timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be different. For example, there are a case where the push button 31B is vibrated with a first strength and a case where the push button 31B is vibrated with a second strength larger than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength. When making the push button 31B vibrate with the first strength, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the strength of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effect and the reliability of the jackpot may be common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern and the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed in each of the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the vibration effect.

In addition to this, when the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is the first mode and the second mode. , The jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time and a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. Make the jackpot reliability different in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the look-ahead notice. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect.

Alternatively, when the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is a plurality of execution timings that can execute the vibration effect as the notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. It may be possible to execute only at any one of the timings of. For example, the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed only at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice can be executed, the vibration effect is announced as a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. Can be suitably recognized as having been executed.

When the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed at the timing when the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution is executed, the big hit reliability in the variable display during execution is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the advance notice effect may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect. For example, when the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a warning effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continuously vibrates for a predetermined time, and the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect. The vibration mode of the above is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, any of the cases where the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed at the timing when the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution can be executed. It is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect has been executed.

When the execution pattern of the vibration effect and the jackpot reliability are shared between the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model, it is executed at a specific timing. Even if the mode of the vibration effect executed by the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the mode of the vibration effect executed by the second model pachinko game machine 1 are different, it is a big hit. The reliability may be common. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed by the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the executed vibration effect is different, the jackpot reliability is 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the models of the pachinko gaming machines 1 are different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the effect executed at that time, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. For example, at the timing T2 when the reach is established, when the notification effect for notifying that the reach is established is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated while the video of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is generated, so that the effect can be enhanced.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1, which is different from the first model, share the same execution pattern of vibration effect and jackpot reliability, vibration of the same execution pattern Regarding the production, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the vibration effect is executed as an effect of increasing the chance of another effect, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect can be flexibly adjusted in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect. While making adjustments, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays a decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, and then has a higher jackpot reliability than the reach mode. It is possible to carry out a fanning effect that encourages the development of a reach mode. After the fanning effect is executed, there are cases where the reach mode has a high jackpot reliability and the display result is "missing" without developing into a reach mode with a high jackpot reliability. When developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning success effect that notifies that the reach mode has high jackpot reliability as a result of the effect of the fanning effect. On the other hand, if the display result is "off" without developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the effect result of the fanning effect does not develop into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. Perform a fanning failure production. In executing such a fanning effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing of executing the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the successful fanning effect is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the fanning success effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the fanning success production is executed.

The emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the fanning success effect is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the effect may be the same emission color as the emission color. According to such a configuration, when the fanning success effect is executed, the display result may be "off" even if it develops into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, but the jackpot reliability is excessively increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

Further, when the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative symbol, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. According to such a configuration, not only the interest at the timing immediately before the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed can be improved, but also the expectation for the vibration effect itself is increased, and the vibration effect is executed at other timings as well. It is possible to improve the interest of the time.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model share the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, it is advantageous to the player. The emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect can be "rainbow color" even when the jackpot type is different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among the multiple types of jackpots with different characteristics. do. According to such a configuration, when the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is not misunderstood as if it is the "big hit" of the big hit type having the highest advantage. Can be.

When there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible not to provide an execution pattern in which the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is "rainbow color". According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the push button 31B from becoming a "big hit" of a big hit type, which has a low advantage for the player, even though the push button 31B emits light in a "rainbow color" in the vibration effect. It is possible to prevent the expectation for the vibration effect from being impaired.

The effect control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by utilizing the auditory effect as the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when the vibration effect is being executed, and then gradually changes the specific sound effect from a small volume to a loud volume as a line-of-sight guidance effect. Output to change. According to such a configuration, a player who has difficulty in recognizing a line-of-sight guidance effect using a visual effect can be focused on the operation means before the operation means vibrates.

In the case where the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value, even if the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is used, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value are used. The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the execution pattern may be different from that at a certain time. For example, even if the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the set value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the execution pattern may be higher than when the set value is "1". .. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result becomes a "big hit", it is possible to raise the expectation that the set value has a high degree of advantage.

When the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration effect depends on the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. The vibration time and emission color may be different. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when it is a set value of any one of "1" to "3" and when it is a set value of any one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect It suffices if the vibration time and the emission color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the vibration effect is a high setting that may be the setting value "6" that is most advantageous to the player. Further, for example, the vibration time and the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may differ depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the set value is an even number that may be the set value "6" that is most advantageous to the player by the vibration effect.

Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is red. It may be possible to carry out a vibration effect in a mode of emitting light. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to pay attention not only to the execution of the vibration effect but also to the mode when the vibration effect is executed.

Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is red. When the vibration effect of the mode of emitting light is enabled, the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. It may happen. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is not executed at any of the timings T1 and T2, the vibration at the timing T1 is performed. When the combination of the effect execution pattern and the vibration effect execution pattern at the timing T2 becomes a specific combination, it may be definitively notified that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors. Even if the vibration effect is not executed, not only can the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established can be increased, but also the attention to the mode of the vibration effect at the timing T2 can be further increased. ..

The vibration effect may be executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors is not executed at any of the timings T3 and T4, the vibration at the timing T3 is performed. When the combination of the effect execution pattern and the vibration effect execution pattern at the timing T4 is a specific combination, it may be definitively notified that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored vibration. Even if the effect is not executed, it is possible not only to raise the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, but also to pay more attention to the mode of the vibration effect at the timing T4. Can be enhanced.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is a vibration effect of not deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit". The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the above may be different. For example, in a vibration effect in which the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is not deterministically notified that the display result is a "big hit". The vibration time is longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, while the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the mode in which the display result is not definitively notified that the display result is the "big hit" is monotonous, the display result is definitively notified that the display result is the "big hit". In the vibration effect of the above mode, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined time signature. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration effect in the mode of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is a special vibration effect.

When the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed or at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed without fail. According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result will be a "big hit" due to the execution of the reach effect is suitably increased by preferably recognizing the vibration of the operating means. be able to.

When the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established, the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and The vibration effect may be executed at any of the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at timing T3 and timing T4 are lower than the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at timing T1 and timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4 does not fall below the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 and the timing T2. Or, the execution pattern of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 may be limited. For example, when the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE2 is executed at the timing T1, the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE5 is executed at the timing T3, and the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE8 is executed at the timing T4. To limit. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the credibility of the jackpot reliability can be prevented from being lowered.

When the vibration effect linked to the notice effect can be executed, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the notice effect and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the notice effect may be different. For example, in the vibration effect linked to the notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated according to the beat of the music played in the interlocking notice effect. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the character advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated according to the sound effect when the character is operating. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the notice effect, the push button 31B is made to emit light in a color different from the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect not linked to the notice effect. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to the notice effect or not linked to the notice effect. ..

The present box production may be made feasible. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character having a hammer as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B) may pop out from the opened present box, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation that the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed due to the execution of the present box effect.

When the operation effect for operating the push button 31B can be executed, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective during the operation valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is effective, The push button 31B may be turned on. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is turned on in a manner different from the lighting mode. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect, the lighting mode may be controlled so that the push button 31B is continuously lit in red for 3 seconds to vibrate the push button 31B. .. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is turned on in the operation effect, the push button 31B is switched between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. It may be controlled so as to be a suggestion lighting mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective. The operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be turned on in order to notify that the operation of the operation lever is effective during the lever operation effective period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is effective. In this case, the lighting mode may be controlled so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the lever operation valid period to suggest lever operation. The lighting mode for suggesting lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting button operation.

For example, when the special figure game or the like is not executed, the push button 31B or the like is operated by the player, for example, the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the setting of the type of the output music or background, and the image display. Settings related to the effect, such as the brightness setting of the device 5 and the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, may be changeable. For example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from the menu screen, or a different operation is performed according to the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. Further, the push button 31B may be turned on in order to notify that the setting related to the effect can be changed when the special figure game or the like is not executed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is turned on, and the push button 31B in the operation effect is turned on in a mode different from the lighting mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the setting related to the effect can be changed.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 10SH)
In relation to the feature unit 10SH, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and that can perform a vibration effect in which the operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-051075 (see).

Generally, a player plays a game while looking at a display means on which a variable display or various effects are displayed. Therefore, when the operating means is not in the player's field of view, it may not be possible to recognize that the operating means is vibrating even if the vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effect is executed and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 10SH can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. It is a machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, etc.), and an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a player. Is provided with a push button 31B capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like), a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a push button 31B). The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means that can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a player's It is possible to execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B, etc.), and the vibration effect is controlled to the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed), and the vibration effect executing means is , The vibration effect can be executed at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , Timing T2 where reach is established, timing T3 during execution of normal reach reach effect and timing during execution of super reach reach effect after timing T1 and timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings of T4 and the like), regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect is produced in a common manner. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is at any timing of timing T1 and timing T2, or at any timing of timing T3 and timing T4. However, the vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time of the push button 31B and the emission color are common), and the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing ( For example, production control The CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 is characterized in that the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the operating means before the vibration effect is executed, and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 10SH is the gaming machine of the means 1, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed (for example, effect control). The CPU 120 may perform the vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed).

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, so that the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 10SH is a specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect in the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2. , The reach effect of super reach can be executed, etc.), and the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Is able to execute the vibration effect while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed).

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect may be executed when the specific effect is executed, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 3 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images. The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, an effect image of the line-of-sight guidance effect). Is always lower in priority than small symbols, hold number display, various error notifications, hold display, active display, background image, higher priority than decorative symbols, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while suitably ensuring the visibility of predetermined information.

The gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 10SH is any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 4, and the vibration effect executing means has the vibration effect of the first aspect and the advantageous state over the first aspect. It is possible to execute the vibration effect of the second aspect, which suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled is high (for example, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and push button 31B. It is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in white and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in red, and the push button 31B emits light for 1.5 seconds. When the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit red light is executed, rather than when the vibration effect of vibrating and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second aspect is easier to execute than the vibration effect of the first aspect (for example, pachinko game). In the machine 1, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. At the same time, it is easier to perform a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in red, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the expectation that the vibration effect of the second aspect is executed.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration according to the feature portion 10SH may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

(Explanation of feature parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 12-1 shows a configuration example of the effect device related to the feature portions 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for effect, which is a movable effect device, is provided in front of the lower end, which is a lower edge portion on the front side that overlaps with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to the operating motor via, for example, a link mechanism. By transmitting the power from the operation motor, the movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be capable of changing its position by power from, for example, a solenoid for operation or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is configured by using a decorative member, and has a configuration capable of covering the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the player cannot see it. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed by using transparent glass or synthetic resin or as a simple opening, and has a structure capable of being seen through so that the player can visually recognize the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built in the operation rod (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or wholly formed of a translucent member. As a result, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light by turning on the lever lamp 9B1. Further, when the button lamp 9B2 is turned on, the push button 31B can be made to emit light.

For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally formed, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or at a position close to the push button 31B, may be built in the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, or may be provided at the root position of the operation lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to the big hit game state, it is possible to execute an operation unit effect including a light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. In the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect, the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In the light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect, one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 is lit to cause one of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect. May be good. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be made to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect.

FIG. 12-2 (A) shows a setting example of the operation unit effect pattern used to execute the operation unit effect. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation unit effect patterns, operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. The emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and application are set according to each operation unit effect pattern. The emission color corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates a light emission mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates a vibration mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state when the operation unit effect corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern is executed. Applications corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicate the timing at which the operation unit effect is executed for each operation unit effect pattern.

The operation unit effect can be executed at a plurality of timings accompanying the progress of the variable display, such as when the pre-variation starts, when the target variation starts, when the reach is established, when the reach develops, and when the hit / miss notification is agitated. The start of the pre-variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. The start of the target variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. When the reach is established, it is the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display is in the reach mode. The reach development is the timing corresponding to the case where the development production is executed along with the reach production of the super reach. The development effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect of the super reach is executed (development of the reach) after the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. The hit / miss notification fanning is the timing corresponding to the fanning effect prior to the hit / miss notification effect that notifies whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), a plurality of operation unit effect patterns that can be used to execute the operation unit effect according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. In addition, different operation unit effect patterns are set to be usable according to a plurality of timings at which the operation unit effect can be executed.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when only the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and the reach effect of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. As the reach effect of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach effects including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach effect may include an effect in which the effect modes are different from each other. Each reach effect may include an effect having a common effect mode to each other. The decision rate when the variable display result is "big hit" and the decision rate when the variable display result is not "big hit" are set so that the jackpot reliability according to each reach effect is obtained. Just do it. Depending on the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random value for determining the variation pattern, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the reach effect of the super reach, the effect mode in the reach effect, etc. It should be possible to set.

The operation unit effect is executed at a predetermined ratio according to whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", regardless of the specific effect that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as the reach effect. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of. An operation unit effect that can be executed regardless of such a specific effect is also referred to as a single operation unit effect. On the other hand, there is a case where the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with the specific effect. The effect of light emission or vibration associated with such a specific effect is also called a specific interlocking effect.

FIG. 12-2 (B) shows a setting example when executing the specific interlocking effect. In this setting example, when a specific interlocking effect is executed along with a plurality of specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, music reproduction, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A. The emission color and vibration pattern are set. The emission color in the specific effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can emit light as a part of the specific effect. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as a part of the specific effect. As described above, since the specific interlocking effect can be executed as a part of the specific effect, the jackpot reliability is the same as that of the specific effect, and the original jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking effect is included in the special vibration effect that can be executed with the execution of the specific effect. The light emission of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emitting effect that can be executed with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach effect of SP reach A may be, for example, a jackpot reliability of about 40%. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the number of rounds is the maximum (for example, 16 rounds) of the second jackpot type. The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery effect related to the jackpot type according to the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state and the end condition, and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are notified in advance in the jackpot game state. It may be a lottery effect regarding the presence or absence of rank up and the amount of increase, which is the number of rounds increased from the number of rounds. As the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, when it becomes possible to control the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that has won the V winning opening in the V winning attacker, the opening presence / absence and opening time of the V winning attacker , The number of times of opening, the end condition of the probability variation control, and the like, it may be possible to execute the lottery effect regarding the jackpot game state having different advantages. When it becomes possible to control from the small hit game state to the big hit game state based on the occurrence of the V prize due to the game ball entering the V prize attacker, the opening presence / absence, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or the opening number of the V winning attacker, or It may be possible to execute a lottery effect relating to a small hit game state or a big hit game state having different advantages depending on the number of rounds of the big hit game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning.

Until the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released is started, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled, and then the V by the game ball entering the V-winning attacker from the start of the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released. In the period until the winning of the prize, the vibration strong monitoring state may be controlled, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled so as not to vibrate. Then, when the V prize is generated, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled, and the effect including the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is more difficult to detect a vibration error than the strong vibration monitoring state. During the period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibration, the vibration strength monitoring state is controlled. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibration, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled. When a vibration error is detected, an alarm image is displayed, an alarm sound is output, an alarm lamp is lit, an alarm signal is output, or a part or a combination of all of them is controlled by the control of the effect control CPU 120. It suffices if the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality can be executed. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be stopped by controlling the CPU 103 in the gaming control microcomputer 100. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor the vibration and suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the notification of the vibration error due to the inappropriate abnormality determination or the stop state of the game.

FIG. 12-3 shows the setting contents of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration modes of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. FIG. 12-3 (A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect. FIG. 12-3 (B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect.

The vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the pre-variation. In the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by AKC02, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by AKC03, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes rainbow color. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC11, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation unit effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC12, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC13, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes rainbow color.

In the vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKR1 when the reach is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC21, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In the vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKR2 when the reach is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC22, the light emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes orange.

As the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach is established, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established and the effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be able to be executed. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. .. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the control load of the effect and the increase of the control data may be prevented by having the same vibration mode of the vibration effect.

The vibration pattern AKV21 has an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS1 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC31, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

In the vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode during the on-period is set in accordance with the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC32, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

As the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect at the time of reach development, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development and the effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be able to be executed. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. .. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the control load of the effect and the increase of the control data may be prevented by having the same vibration mode of the vibration effect.

The vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the vibration mode in which the on-period continues until the movement of the player who operates the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected in the effective detection period. It should be. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed at the time of the hit / miss notification. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of the hit / miss notification. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC41, the light emission color in the light emission effect that causes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes gold.

When the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed, whether or not the effective detection period is provided may be different depending on the type of effect executed with the variable display, for example, the type of reach effect. good. When an effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between golden light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. You may control it. If the effective detection period is not provided, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be controlled so as to emit light continuously in gold for a period of vibration. On the other hand, when an effective detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B be switched between light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) of red, which is different from gold, every 150 milliseconds. It may be controlled so as to have a light emitting mode for the above. By executing the light emission effect of the light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it is effective to operate the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A while executing the vibration effect. , Can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, the priority of the light emission control may be different by using a plurality of lamp layers in which the lamp control data can be set. For example, in the first lamp layer, as a light emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation, a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. Set the lamp control data. Lamp control data is set in the second lamp layer as a light emitting mode for suggesting a special operation so that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Priority is given to execution. As a result, the light emitting mode for special operation suggestion may be controlled to be preferentially the light emitting mode for the light emitting effect rather than the light emitting mode for normal operation suggestion.

The plurality of reach effects that serve as super reach may include a strong SP reach having a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach having a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of the strong SP reach, the hit / fail notification effect is executed after executing the motion detection effect by detecting the movement of the player which is the operation for the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a strong SP reach is executed, it is turned on until the player's operation to be operated on the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be such that the period continues. In the reach effect of the weak SP reach, the hit / fail notification effect is executed without executing the motion detection effect. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a weak SP reach is executed, the vibration mode may be set according to the vibration pattern AKV31 1500 milliseconds or more before the hit / fail notification effect. It should be noted that there may be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 5000 milliseconds, which is an effective detection period. It may be controlled to the vibration mode which becomes the period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are vibrated every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled by switching between a period and an off period during which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the on period is such that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may be controlled according to the vibration mode. There may be cases where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit gold light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. It may be controlled so that the light emitting mode is switched between (lighting) and non-light emitting (extinguishing). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A continuously vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A for 2000 milliseconds. The operation lever and the push button 31B may be controlled so as to emit light in gold.

The vibration pattern AKV41 is an on-period vibration mode linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 is an on-period vibration mode linked to the screen display in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV43 is an on-period vibration mode linked to music reproduction in the reach production of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV44 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes blue due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes gold due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect changes from blue to gold through the red color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, and a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. There are cases where it becomes. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes rainbow color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes white due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes rainbow color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

FIG. 12-4 shows an execution example of the effect by vibrating and emitting light of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the emission colors of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have normal emission brightness set to be low in the normal emission state, and the emission color is different. It suffices to emit light so that it becomes white. Alternatively, in the normal light emitting state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-light emitting so as not to emit light.

The effect execution example AKA01 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit white light is executed. Operation unit effect pattern When the operation unit effect by any one of AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 is executed, the emission color becomes white. The operation unit effect pattern AKC01 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC11 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Both the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 has a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22. Even when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes white.

The effect execution example AKA02 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit red light is executed. When the operation unit effect by any of the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 and AKC12 is executed, the emission color becomes red. The operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC02 and AKC12 has a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the music reproduction of SP Reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes red is included.

The effect execution example AKA03 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in rainbow colors is executed. When the operation unit effect by any of the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 and AKC13 is executed, the emission color becomes rainbow color. The operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC03 and AKC13 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the jackpot confirmation notification or the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes rainbow color.

The effect execution example AKA04 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in pink is executed. Operation unit effect pattern When the operation unit effect by the AKC21 is executed, the emission color becomes pink. The operation unit effect pattern AKC21 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11.

The effect execution example AKA05 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in orange is executed. Operation unit effect pattern When the operation unit effect by the AKC22 is executed, the emission color becomes orange. The operation unit effect pattern AKC22 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12.

The effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit blue light is executed. The emission color does not turn blue when the operation unit effect is executed. When the movable body movement of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes blue. Further, when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes blue is included.

The effect execution example AKV07 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit gold light is executed. Operation unit effect pattern When the operation unit effect by the AKC41 is executed, the emission color becomes gold. The operation unit effect pattern AKC41 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of the success / failure notification. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. When the image display of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes gold. Further, when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes gold is included.

As described above, the emission colors of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit effect, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode in the vibration effect. In addition to the emission color, any emission mode such as emission time, number of emission (number of blinks), emission cycle (blinking cycle), and emission brightness can be set to the execution timing of the operation unit effect, jackpot reliability, and vibration in the vibration effect. Depending on the aspect, they may be different or may be common.

The operation unit effect can be executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect or a continuous advance notice effect when it is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The pre-reading notice effect suggests whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit" before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous notice effect continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous advance notice effect can be executed by using the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of reserved special figures at the time of starting winning. As the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories, a plurality of continuous effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the effect mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is deducted by 1 each time the special figure hold storage number at the time of starting winning is set and the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 12-5 shows a setting example of a continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect. For the continuous effect pattern, for example, using a random number value for determining the continuous effect pattern, the continuous effect pattern determination table according to the number of reserved memories is referred to, and a determination value matching the random value is assigned according to the judgment result at the time of winning. The decision may be made by determining the decision result.

FIG. 12-5 (A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is “2”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD01, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD02, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD03, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD04, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD05, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD06, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed.

FIG. 12-5 (B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “3”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation unit effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". When is, the operation unit effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 12-5 (C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “4”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation unit effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is When it is "0", the operation unit effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous advance notice effect, to be executed. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the effect control command (start opening winning designation command, hold storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of winning the start is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the read-ahead notice condition is not satisfied. When there is a command reception, the notification content by the received command is specified, and for example, the winning judgment result is specified as the notification content by the winning judgment result command.

The winning judgment result uses the game random numbers extracted at the time of starting winning to determine whether or not the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is determined as a specific fluctuation pattern. , The result determined by the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. As the winning determination result, for example, one of jackpot, super reach confirmation at the time of loss, reach confirmation at the time of loss, and general at the time of loss may be indicated. The jackpot winning determination result is a determination result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The winning judgment result of the super reach confirmation at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result. The winning judgment result of the reach confirmation at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss. Is. When the general winning judgment result at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range. It is a judgment result corresponding to.

It suffices if the pre-reading notice condition can be satisfied when the judgment result at the time of winning is either a big hit or the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. In addition, if the judgment result at the time of winning this time is either a big hit or the super reach at the time of losing is confirmed, and if all the judgment results at the time of winning up to the previous time corresponding to the hold memory are general at the time of losing, the pre-reading notice condition May be possible. If the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect, which is the continuous advance notice effect, is already set to start, the pre-reading advance notice condition may be restricted so as not to be satisfied.

If the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for pre-reading advance notice execution decision and referring to a pre-reading notice execution decision table prepared in advance stored in ROM 121 according to a winning determination result, etc. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect may be determined as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect. In step AKS102, it is determined to be either "not executed" when the pre-reading notice effect is not executed or "executed" when the pre-reading notice effect is executed. It is determined whether or not the determination result at this time is determined to be "executed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When it is determined that "execution is performed" to execute the pre-reading notice effect (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved storages may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, the continuous effect pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a continuous effect pattern and referring to a continuous effect pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to a winning determination result, the continuous effect pattern can be determined. Should be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105, the pre-reading notice setting process is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, the pre-reading advance notice flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (such as the effect control flag setting unit) may be set to the ON state.

In such a look-ahead notice setting process, when the winning judgment result is either a big hit or a super reach confirmation at the time of loss, the look-ahead notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the look-ahead notice execution by step AKS102 is executed. It becomes possible to determine the presence / absence and the continuous production pattern by the step AKS105. Then, when the winning judgment result is a big hit, even if the winning judgment result is determined to be "executed" to execute the pre-reading notice effect by step AKS102 at a higher rate than the case where the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. good. Further, in step AKS105, when the winning determination result is a big hit, the continuous effect pattern may be determined at a different ratio from the case where the winning determination result is the case where the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. In this way, it suffices if the continuous advance notice effect, which is the look-ahead advance notice effect, can be executed based on the winning determination result, which is the look-ahead determination result.

FIG. 12-7 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 12-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. You just have to decide. The variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are mainly generated by setting the command transmission at the start of variation of the special symbol when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern determined as a usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result determined by using a random number value for determining a special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is displayed. It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "loss". It becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols aligned with the same even-numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. Further, when the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", it suffices if it is possible to determine the combination of the fixed decorative symbols aligned with the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the combination of the fixed decorative symbols to be the reach-off combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the combination of the fixed decorative symbols to be the non-reach out-of-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When deciding the combination of the fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data which is a random value for determining the symbol and referring to the symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the variable display content, the combination is determined. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like, the operation unit effect is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. When the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the remaining number of times may be subtracted by 1, and the operation unit effect pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous effect pattern. As the continuous effect pattern, the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. When the remaining number of times after subtraction is "0", the pre-reading advance notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the presence / absence of the operation unit effect corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit effect pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the effect of the operation unit is extracted, and the operation unit effect determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 is referred to depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the operation unit effect and the operation unit effect pattern used when executing the operation unit effect. The operation unit effect corresponding to this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. .. Therefore, the operation unit effect corresponding to the variable display this time is limited so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit effect included in the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed. Is set.

In step AKS202, when the specific interlocking effect including the special vibration effect is executed along with the specific effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted. For example, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, in the range of the variable display in which the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed, a limit limit is provided so that all the operation unit effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit effect at a predetermined ratio at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while at the time of reach development or The execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit effect at the timing corresponding to the hit / fail notification. In this case, in the range of the variable display in which the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit limit is set so that some operation unit effects cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display. .. In addition, in the range of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, a limit may be provided so that a part or all of the operation unit effect is difficult to be executed during the execution of the variable display. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 that determines the operation unit effect in step AKS202 can limit the execution of the operation unit effect including the vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed.

In addition, in the case where the operation unit effect is determined by step AKS202, when a special effect different from the specific effect is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the judgment result at the time of winning, the special effect is different from the case where the special effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation unit effect may be set so that a part or all of the operation unit effect can be easily executed during the execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation unit effect, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step AKS203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (variable display effect control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of effect control patterns (operation unit effect control patterns) prepared in response to the operation unit effect determined by step AKS202 and set them as the use pattern. good. Further, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit or the like) is set (step AKS204). Then, the variation of the decorative pattern or the like is started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image is displayed. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the variable start, the setting for updating the hold display and the like is made in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the hold display or the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 12-8 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) and an operation unit effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) corresponds to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Contains control data used to control. The operation unit effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (B) includes control data used for controlling the execution of the operation unit effect.

The variable display effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, and the like. .. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the effect control process timer value, which is a stored value of the effect control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation. Is preset. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command was received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process was executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set corresponding to the predetermined control contents and processing contents.

The display control data includes data indicating a display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data showing a voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data showing an output mode such as a sound effect linked to a variable display of a decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating a light emitting drive mode during variable display of the decorative pattern for a light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emitting mode of the light emitting body during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's operation, such as a tilting operation for the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation for the trigger button, or a pressing operation for the push button 31B, and each operation. Data that indicates the mode of the effect operation according to the motion detection of the player, such as data that specifies the control content of the effect operation when is effectively detected, is included. The vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the on period and the driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different depending on the content of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and some process data includes some of these. You can. Further, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display during effect processing in step S172 of the effect control process process, each time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, it is determined. Controls the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9 and light emitters such as decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) are controlled. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. The data # n, the lamp control data # 1 to the lamp control data # n, the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data # n, and the vibration control data # 1 to the vibration control data # n are the control of the effect operation in the effect device. The effect control execution data # 1 to the effect control execution data # n that indicate the contents and specify the execution of the effect control are configured.

The operation unit effect control pattern is composed of, for example, process data including the effect control process timer determination value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern includes data indicating a lighting operation mode of the light emitting body in the operation unit effect, such as lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern is data that specifies a light emission mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect. The vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern includes data indicating an on period and a drive mode of the vibration generator in the operation unit effect, such as driving the vibration motor 131. That is, the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect.

FIG. 12-9 shows a setting example of the timing at which the operation unit effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. The timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings at which the operation unit effect at the start of the pre-variation can be executed in response to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that becomes the pre-variation is started. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the read-ahead notice setting process, the operation unit effect is executed at a part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation according to the number of remaining times. be able to. For example, when the number of remaining times is "3", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT01, and when the number of remaining times is "2", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT02. When is "1", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT03.

The timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 12-9 is a timing at which the operation unit effect at the start of the target variation can be executed in response to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that becomes the target variation is started. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the read-ahead notice setting process, the operation unit based on the operation unit effect pattern according to the remaining number of times in a part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. At the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation after the effect is executed, the operation unit effect according to the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times of "0" can be executed. Further, at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation, the operation unit effect may be executed. Specifically, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 to AKC13 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. be able to.

As in the case of timing AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is started may be such that the operation unit effect can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. As described above, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is started may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIGS. 12-9, as the operation unit effects corresponding to the variable display this time, the operation unit effects when the reach is established, the operation unit effects when the reach is developed, and the operation unit effects when the hit / fail notification is agitated are provided. Each is a feasible timing. For example, according to the operation unit effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the operation unit effect at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. There are cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation unit effect, and there are cases where the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered. Specifically, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established. Can be done. Further, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development. Alternatively, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 is determined by step ASK202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification.

FIG. 12-10 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-10 (A) becomes white and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 12-10 (B). It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 12-10 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. The emission effect that the emission color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is the first brightness in which the white emission brightness is high and the second brightness in which the emission brightness is low, for example, every 30 milliseconds in the on period of 300 milliseconds. By alternately repeating the above, the emission brightness of white may change periodically.

FIG. 12-11 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-11 (A) turns red and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-11 (B). It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-11 (A) becomes rainbow, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-11 (B). , It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 12-11 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 1500 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 12-11 (A), the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are continuously red in the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 according to the on period of the vibration effect. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 is used, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, a plurality of LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light by shifting the emission colors of red, reddish purple, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange according to the elapsed time and the light emitting position. , Lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow color. The light emitting positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified in a plurality of sections such as the upper part and the lower part of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2. It suffices if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIG. 12-12 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-12 (A) becomes white and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-12 (B). It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. As shown in FIG. 12-12 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 1500 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 12-12 (A), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. The emission effect that the emission color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is the first brightness in which the white emission brightness is high and the second brightness in which the emission brightness is low, for example, every 30 milliseconds in the on period of 1500 milliseconds. By alternately repeating the above, the emission brightness of white may change periodically.

FIG. 12-13 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is red as shown in FIG. 12-13 (A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 12-13 (B). It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 12-13 (A) becomes rainbow color and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 12-13 (B). , It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. As shown in FIG. 12-13 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 3000 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 12-13 (A), the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 according to the on period of the vibration effect. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit red light by alternately repeating the first brightness having a high emission brightness and the second brightness having a low emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission mode included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 changes the emission brightness in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. It becomes. As described above, as an effect mode of the light emission effect, not only the light emission color but also the light emission cycle may be different to suggest the jackpot reliability. In the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission, for example, every 20 milliseconds. As an effect mode of the light emission effect, while the light emission cycle is common, it may be possible to suggest the jackpot reliability by making the light emission colors different. In this way, for example, when the emission colors in the light emission effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission effect by sharing the light emission cycle.

FIG. 12-14 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, in response to the effect AKR1 which is the effect when the reach is established as shown in FIGS. 12-14 (A). Includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in (B) becomes pink, and a vibration effect in which the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 12-14 (C) is used. The effect AKR1 that is an effect when the reach is established may be, for example, an effect that displays an effect image indicating the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect that displays a background image according to the establishment of the reach. In addition, any other effect that accompanies the establishment of reach may be used. As shown in FIG. 12-14 (C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated a plurality of times at predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-14 (B), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in pink in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light.

FIG. 12-15 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, in response to the effect AKR2 which is the effect when the reach is established as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (A). It includes a light emitting effect in which the light emitting color shown in (B) turns orange and a vibration effect in which the vibration pattern AKV12 shown in FIG. 12-15 (C) is used. The effect AKR2, which is an effect when the reach is established, may be an effect of displaying an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image according to the establishment of the reach. In addition, any other effect that accompanies the establishment of reach may be used. The effect mode may be different between the effect AKR1 and the effect AKR2, which are the effects when the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 12-15 (C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 milliseconds). After repeating twice alternately, the vibration mode includes an on period of the second vibration on time (for example, 250 ms) and an on period of the third vibration on time (for example, 500 ms). As shown in FIG. 12-15 (B), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. Further, when the on periods of the vibration effects are different vibration on times, the light emitting patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit orange light. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by alternately repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, corresponding to the effects AKS1 and AKS2 which are the effect when the reach develops, and the emission color becomes white. , And vibration effect by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS1 in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC31. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS2 in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC32. In any of the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect.

The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the hit / fail effect at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification, and the light emission effect that the emission color becomes gold and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. ,including. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period is 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in gold according to the on period of the vibration effect.

As shown in FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In this case, a vibration effect is executed by a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emission color is white or the emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emission color becomes red and the case where the emission color becomes rainbow color. That is, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common depending on whether the emission color is red or the emission color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is common, the case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common may be provided regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation includes the operation unit effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm out. As for the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, is executed. Includes things. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development become white with a common emission color, and the vibration effect is produced. There are cases where the vibration modes of the above are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation includes the operation unit effect that the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 13 at the time of reach development, and the vibration effect is produced. The vibration mode of the above may be different. As in the case where the emission color becomes white, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation is the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect. Includes what is common. Further, as in the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, and the light emission. It may include those having different light emitting modes of the effect. The operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development does not have to include an operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation and a light emission mode different from that of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification includes an operation unit effect such as an operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold due to the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. I'm out. The jackpot reliability of this operation unit effect is 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is 100% common between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered, and the vibration effect is produced. There are cases where the vibration modes of the above are different. Further, the emission color is different and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the jackpot reliability is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so that the stick controller 31A It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using the operation members such as the push button 31B and the push button 31B to improve the game entertainment.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is that the emission color becomes white, red, or rainbow color due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. Includes those that perform light emission effects. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target variation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 12 at the time when the reach is established, and the vibration of the vibration effect. There are cases where the modes are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately varied. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development is such that the operation unit effect is performed by the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32. Contains things. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect. Is different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be produced. It can be diversified appropriately to improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include an effect that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development may include one that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be performed. It can be diversified appropriately to improve the entertainment of the game.

The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is 100% regardless of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability is 100% when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed may differ depending on the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing when the vibration effect is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. The vibration modes of the vibration effect include the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity driven by the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of the strong vibration and the weak vibration in the vibration intensity, and others. , It suffices if the arbitrary vibration patterns that vibrate the operating members such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are different, so that they can be made different.

The plurality of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the movable body movement, the image display, the music reproduction, the jackpot confirmation notification, and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the reach effect of SP reach A, for example, the jackpot reliability is about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. Become. Since the movable body movement, the image display, and the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A are all executed as a part of the reach effect, they do not have the jackpot reliability individually. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect of deterministically notifying that the variable display result is a "big hit". The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are jackpot type lottery effects according to the number of rounds and the like, corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. The jackpot confirmation notification and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to the reach production of SP reach A in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result is "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state. It is different from the production with a high hit reliability. In this way, among a plurality of specific effects, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed for the specific effect having the jackpot reliability. It suffices if it is set as. Further, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIG. 12-16 shows an execution example of the effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the execution mode of the effect by light emission.

In the effect execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit white light according to the background display. , The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light according to the background display. , The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit rainbow colors by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed as the background. While the light is emitted so as to change from black to white according to the above, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF04, when the character display of the image display device 5 is a blue display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit blue light in accordance with the character display. , The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect.

For example, the background display and the character display of the image display device 5, and other predetermined effects by displaying an arbitrary effect image can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the variable display during effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, variable display and the like are performed using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5 and lamp control data for controlling light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. There is. When the operation unit effect is executed during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light due to the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. It is possible to emit light in the light emitting mode of. In the variable display during effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the operation unit effect is performed using the control data read from the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. The control data includes lamp control data that controls the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data that controls the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In contrast to the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect in the operation unit effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect of the operation unit effect due to the predetermined effect. Is. In this way, the operating members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit light by different light emitting modes. It is possible to improve the game entertainment by appropriately diversifying the production by.

The predetermined effect may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the screen display of the image display device 5 or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit light in a emission color corresponding to the sound output of, for example, BGM, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light emission color of the light emission effect in the club effect may be emitted. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound that gives the player an impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light according to the sound output. On the other hand, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. Even in this way, by making the light emitting mode different between the operating members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. , It is possible to improve the game entertainment by appropriately diversifying the production by light emission. In the predetermined effect, the screen display of the image display device 5 is dimmed, and in addition to stopping the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. are not emitted (turned off). May be. When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention to the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

FIG. 12-17 shows an example of setting an effect period in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed along with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed along with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ03 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to red and then to gold due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43. ..

The period AKZ04 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ04 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow color due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is to stop and display the confirmation decoration symbol that is the display result of the decoration symbol, to display the production image of the scene where the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character in the reach production, the speaker 8L, By outputting a big hit confirmation sound by 8R, turning on the big hit confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, or by combining a part or all of these, the player can recognize the big hit arbitrarily. It is sufficient if the notification of is executed.

In addition, following the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ04 accompanying the jackpot confirmation notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to enhance the impression of the effect and improve the interest of the game by executing the specific interlocking effect accompanying the jackpot confirmation notification while increasing the expectation of the player by the effect of the operation unit. When executing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation unit effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the special vibration effect may be different between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emitting effect or the specific light emitting effect may be used. The light emission mode may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The emission brightness may be different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By making the vibration mode and the light emission mode different to give the effect a sharpness, it is possible to easily recognize the distinction between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, appropriately diversify the effect, and improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in accordance with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes white due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes directing. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow color due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes light emission effect.

12-18 to 12-20 show a case where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIG. 12-18 shows production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body movement in the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIG. 12-19 shows an effect execution example AKG11 to AKG13 when the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIG. 12-20 shows production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the reach production of SP reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position that is in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach effect of the SP reach A is started due to the reach development, the movable body operation is performed by changing the position of the movable body 32 from the initial position as in the effect execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linearly or parallelly moving upward from the initial position, and the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32 is "SP. An effect image showing a message such as "reach A" is displayed. After that, by continuing to change the position of the movable body 32, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the effect execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is ..." is displayed.

Example of effect execution A specific interlocking effect is executed according to the position change of the movable body 32 which is a movable body operation such as AKG01 and AKG02, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17. , Including. Further, when the position of the movable body 32 is continuously changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the upper end front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches the upper end front from the lower end front with respect to the display screen which is the initial position is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated over this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode during which the lever or the push button 31B is vibrated during the on-period. Alternatively, when the period is AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode in which the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 250 milliseconds to be switched between an on period and a non-vibrating off period. Further, the specific light emitting effect may be executed in a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emit blue light over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between blue light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 250 milliseconds. May be good.

Production execution example When the movable body operation in the reach production of SP reach A such as AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the positions of the movable body 32 of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are changed, for example. As a result, the light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the emission color and the emission brightness gradually change from the lower side to the upper side. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N have a blue emission color when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, and the emission brightness changes in a wavy shape according to the height and time. It suffices to emit light as if it were.

After the movement of the movable body is completed as in the effect execution example AKG03, the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A as in the effect execution example AKG11. At this time, for example, the character display indicating the message "super hot" is performed in the gold display color. Further, as in the effect execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Example of effect execution A specific interlocking effect is executed along with the display of the effect image to be an image display such as AKG11 and AKG12, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold in the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. 12-17. Includes. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of the effect image in the reach effect different from the character display is started as in the effect execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "super hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the vibration that is the on period for continuously vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A over this period AKZ02. A special vibration effect may be performed depending on the embodiment. Further, during the period AKZ02, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are alternately repeated every 10 milliseconds with the first brightness having a high golden emission brightness and the second brightness having a low emission brightness. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

Example of effect execution When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A such as AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are, for example, on the display screen of the image display device 5. The emission color may be gold according to the image display and the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N have a golden emission color as the effect image is displayed, such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image is started, the light may be emitted in a light emitting color different from the gold color.

After the display of the production image as in the production execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the production execution example AKG21 as the music reproduction in the reach production of the SP reach A. Subsequently, as in the production execution example AKG22, the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. After that, the sound of the music phrase PH03 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the production execution example AKG23. In this way, by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 according to the progress of the production, it is sufficient that the entire music reproduction in the reach production of the SP reach A can be executed.

Production Execution Example A specific interlocking effect is executed along with the output of audio for playing music such as AKG21 to AKG23, and the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A is the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 and the emission color changing from blue to red in the period AKZ03 shown in FIG. 12-17, and further. It includes a specific light emission effect that changes from red to gold. Production execution example In AKG21, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color is blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. Production execution example In AKG22, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color is red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. Production execution example In AKG23, a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. As described above, it suffices to be able to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output according to the progress of the effect.

FIG. 12-21 shows a case where the musical scale changes in order as the production progresses as the music reproduction execution example AKH01. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (A), in the period AKZ03 in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed along with the music reproduction, each of do, re, mi, fa, so, la, shi, and do The sound corresponding to the scale is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of the do that is output last may be one octave higher than the scale of the do that is output first.

The specific interlocking effect associated with such music reproduction is a light emission effect that is a specific light emission effect in which the emission color changes as shown in FIG. 12-21 (B), and a special emission effect based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 12-21 (C). It can be executed in the period AKZ03 corresponding to the music reproduction, including the vibration effect which is the vibration effect. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 12-21 (C) is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated a plurality of times according to the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 12-21 (B), the specific light emission effect accompanying this special vibration effect is the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the sound output period corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration effect. The emission color of is changed in order between blue, red, and gold. During the period when the audio output is stopped and the period when the special vibration effect is off, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. In the sound output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be different for each scale. For example, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously made to emit blue light for a period of the scale of the first output. Next, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the first brightness having a high red light emission brightness and the second brightness having a low light emission brightness are alternately repeated during the period of the scale. After that, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between golden light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) during the period of the scale of Mi. In this way, by setting the light emission mode in which the light emission amount is different for each light emission color according to each scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the game entertainment.

The reach effect of SP reach A is executably controlled by using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is based on the lamp control data and the vibration control data, and is associated with a specific effect such as moving body movement, image display, and music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect is set to be executable. In the specific interlocking effect, a special vibration effect using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 can be executed. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration effect by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern in the operation unit effect. In this way, the stick controller 31A and the stick controller 31A and It is possible to appropriately diversify the production using the operation member such as the push button 31B to improve the game entertainment.

When executing the operation unit effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are used to emit light of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in accordance with the vibration effect of vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When executing the specific interlocking effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are moved by using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the special vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emission effect for emitting light is executed. A player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, by performing an effect including vibration and light emission of an operation member such as an operation lever of the stick controller 31A and a push button 31B, can display the image. By recognizing the vibration and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the production is enhanced.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed along with the operation of the movable body 32 which is the movable object operation in the reach effect of the SP reach A. As described above, since the special vibration effect can be executed during the operation period of the movable body 32, the effect using the operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIG. 12-17, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the big hit confirmation notification. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to the notification that the jackpot game state is controlled, the effect using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the game entertainment. be able to.

The specific interlocking effect includes a specific light emitting effect due to the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light in association with the special vibration effect by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. Then, the light emitting mode such as the light emitting color is different between the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect in the operation unit effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect. In this way, by making the light emitting mode different according to the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be performed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing of execution is determined by the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. Along with being different, the vibration mode is different. Further, the emission colors are white and red depending on the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT01 at the start of the pre-variation and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. By becoming one of the rainbow colors, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, while the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, so that the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be operated. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production using the members and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is executed by the operation unit effect at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation based on the winning determination result that is the pre-reading determination result. It is executed in the variable display before the variable display to be performed. By making the timing at which the operation unit effect is executed different in this way, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the game entertainment.

As shown in FIGS. 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be performed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emission color is white or the emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emission color becomes red and the case where the emission color becomes rainbow color. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the case where the emission color is red and the case where the emission color is rainbow. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect is an operation unit effect pattern in which the emission color in the light emission effect is different depending on the case where the remaining number of times is other than "0" and the case where the remaining number of times is "0". Some include. For example, the continuous effect pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) includes an operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and an operation unit effect pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , Including. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is red. Therefore, the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation and the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. The light emission mode is different between the two. In this way, by providing a case where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the effect using the operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. Is set to prevent it from becoming degraded. For example, in the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". As a result, it is set to prevent the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 is used when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 or the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is used as the operation unit effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation unit effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later at the start of the target variation, even though the operation unit effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the pre-variation. , It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game without lowering the expectation of the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is the emission color. Including the case where the emission color becomes white and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the on period and the off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. And non-light emission are repeated, and when the emission color turns red, light is continuously emitted according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, and the emission color becomes red. In that case, light is emitted intermittently according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. In the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the setting of the on period is different from each other, so that the light emission mode such as the light emission period in the light emission effect is different. Even in this way, it is sufficient that the case where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different can be provided when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different.

(Modification example of featured parts 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko game machine 1, or the setting of the pachinko game machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be different. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value of. In addition, regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on any advantage regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on such advantage. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on any advantage regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on such advantage.

When the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different and common, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different and common, and when the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different and common, the jackpot reliability is high. The combination of each case, such as a different case and a common case, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect are common when the execution timing is different, or when the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the special vibration effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect or the specific light emission effect. The combination of each case can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. When the vibration modes of the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient that the control load of the light emission effect can be reduced by sharing the light emission mode of the light emission effect. When the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different, it is sufficient that the control load of the vibration effect can be reduced by sharing the vibration mode of the vibration effect. When some vibration modes in the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration effect by sharing the other vibration modes in the vibration effect. For example, when the vibration intensities in the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control load of the vibration effect by sharing the vibration cycle in the vibration effect. When some of the light emitting modes in the light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the light emitting effect can be reduced by sharing the other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect. For example, when the emission colors in the light emission effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission effect by sharing the light emission cycle in the light emission effect. It is sufficient that the control load can be reduced by the same standardization of the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to the execution of the variable display, or instead of the execution of the variable display, when the game is controlled to an arbitrary game state such as a small hit game state or a big hit game state, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect is executed. It may be possible. For example, when the player is controlled to the small hit game state, a predetermined ratio is determined according to the presence / absence of opening of the V winning attacker, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or the number of rounds of the big hit game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect with. When controlled to the jackpot game state, the number of rounds will be increased from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state, such as the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state, the end condition, and the rank up. It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence, the amount of increase, and the like. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking effect along with a specific effect such as a movable object movement in a small hit game state or a big hit game state, image display, and music reproduction.

The specific effect capable of executing the specific interlocking effect may be an arbitrary effect that can be executed according to the execution of the variable display, or may be an arbitrary effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike the reach effect, when a suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to the big hit game state is executed, it is specified in a part or all of the effect period. The interlocking effect may be executable.

When controlled to an arbitrary effect state, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect may be executed. For example, when the effect is controlled to be the special effect mode, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect is executed at a higher rate than when the effect state is controlled to be a different effect mode from the special effect mode. It may be possible.

The operating member capable of performing the effect of vibration or light emission may be any motion detecting member configured to be able to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects a touch operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Further, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. The result of photographing the player's hand or the like using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that the movement by the player can be detected. In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined operation by the player may be used. A contact member that allows the player to come into contact with a hand or the like may be provided together with such a motion detection member, and the contact member may be vibrated or emitted light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. ..

The vibration effect included in the operation unit effect can correspond to the vibration effect in the feature unit 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the feature unit 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effect, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation can correspond to the first vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effect, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation can correspond to the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. The light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect is associated with the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect of the feature unit 48AK, the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect of the feature unit 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect of the feature unit 50AK. It can correspond to the light emission effect. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation unit effect, the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is the light emission associated with the first vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. It can correspond to the production. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effect, the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is the light-emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Can be accommodated. The special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect can correspond to the special vibration effect in the feature portion 49AK.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modified examples, regarding the transition to the time saving state (high base state), the mode of shifting to the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 always operates is adopted. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time saving state (high base state) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 is performed. ) May be used.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the out-of-time symbols or a part of the small hit symbols.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small hit symbols and symbols displayed as missed symbols. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if a time-saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of a transition to the time-saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time-savings will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when performing a lottery of time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the starting port (first starting winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

In addition, in the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state does not change depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. To.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the time-saving symbol lottery uses the missing symbol random number, the specific missing symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performance other than the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, so that the set value can be changed only if it cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving state is already set, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time reduction can be made different for each time reduction symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the time-saving end symbol derivation lottery (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction starts, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is an operating means that can be operated by the player, a vibration effect executing means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and an operating means that accompanies the vibration effect. It is equipped with a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration of the vibration effect is performed according to the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect. The aspect is different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The fact that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed is, for example, a big hit according to the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the application of the operation unit effect pattern. It may be reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, the emission color and the vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, and the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display is in the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the mode is executed or the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed, and vibration. The mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of control to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is in the reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in the light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the light emitting color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode associated with the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The vibration effect can be executed, and the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be used.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 49AK)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and a vibration effect that can execute a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as an operation means that the player can operate and a vibration effect that the operation means vibrates. A predetermined vibration effect is provided with an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect according to the progress of the game. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on the above, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect according to the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. .. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. Just do it. The light emitting effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emitting state color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific effect may be, for example, the reach effect of SP reach A, the jackpot confirmation notification, the jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The higher the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, for example, depending on the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability may be sufficient. The ability to execute the special vibration effect may be, for example, the execution of the vibration effect during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The difference in vibration mode between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, and the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display is in the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not the vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission mode is executed or the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The ratio of the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed is controlled to an advantageous state when executed is common. , The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of control to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is in the reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in the light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the light emitting color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. .. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., which are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode associated with the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode associated with the predetermined vibration effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The predetermined vibration effect can be executed, and the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means is the first timing. In, the line-of-sight guidance effect may not be executed, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be used.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation of 50% or more, which is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

The specific effect executing means can execute an effect of operating the movable member as a specific effect, and the vibration effect executing means may be able to execute a special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of operating the movable member may be, for example, the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect with the notification that the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is performed in an advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit confirmation notification. The special vibration effect associated with this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting effect executing means can execute a specific light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emitting mode differs between the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect. May be good. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission mode may be different, for example, when the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color changes from blue, gold, or blue to gold via red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

When the special vibration effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined vibration effect may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when determining the effect of the operation unit in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 50AK)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect as the operation means that the player can operate and the vibration effect that the operation means vibrates. It is provided with a vibration effect executing means and a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the vibration effect is executed more when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is high, and the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the timing of execution in the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. However, the vibration mode is different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration effect may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern may be sufficient. The timing of execution differs between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, the timings of the start of the pre-variation, AKT01 to AKT03, which are different from the timings of the start of the target variation, AKT11. The difference in vibration mode between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common to the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect, for example, when the emission colors included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are white, red, or rainbow. And so on.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display is in the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode or the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. It is common and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of control to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

Even if the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the difference in the light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the light emitting color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. May be good. Here, the difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emitting mode associated with the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible to emit light with. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The second vibration effect can be executed, and the second vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. The line-of-sight guidance effect may not be executed at the first timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be used.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the first vibration effect in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the pre-reading determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage may be, for example, a variable display that is pre-variable.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a first vibration light emitting mode and a second vibration light emitting mode different from the first vibration light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first vibration light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emitting mode at the time of the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The light emitting mode at the time of the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode may be different between the light emitting effect associated with the first vibration effect and the light emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode is different, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous effect pattern, the emission color of the operation unit effect pattern is different from the case where the residual number of times is "0". All you need is.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation relating to the association of the feature portions 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration of the feature portions 48AK to 50AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration of the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and can be operated by the player. The operating means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.), the predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and the special vibration as the vibration effect that the operating means vibrates. Vibration effect execution means (for example, operation unit effect control pattern and variable display effect control determined in step AKS203) that can execute effects (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). The effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the pattern, and the light emission effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, included in the operation unit effect pattern). The effect during variable display in step S172 is performed by using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, which is capable of executing the light emission effect executing means (for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the emission color). A specific effect execution means (for example, step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game and the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 and a display means (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) and a display means (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 that executes an effect processing during variable display in step S172) based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step S172. Etc.), and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, depending on the operation unit effect pattern or the like). The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the operation unit effect). The emission color included in the pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the use of the operation unit effect pattern, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, period AKZ01 to ~. (Execution of vibration effect in AKZ05, etc.), the vibration state by the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect The display means are different (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and a region around the first display area. A second display area narrower than the display area is included (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51 and is larger than the first display area 20SH51. The display means can display the background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, including the narrow second display area 20SH52). The image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and in the second display area, the front side of the background image. (For example, the image display device 5 relates to the number of prize balls given to the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52. (The acquisition number display 20SHK can be displayed, etc.), at least in the first display area, as a notification display for notifying that the amount of added game value has reached a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image, the game. It is possible to display a first notification display for notifying that the amount of added value for use has reached the first predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of added value for game has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 notifies that the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the number notification display 20SHKH, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state reaches "1000", and the prize given in the big hit game state. When the number of balls reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over", etc.), and the grant amount display is displayed every time the game value is granted in the advantageous state. It is updated (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is displayed when a specific period elapses from the start of the display. The display is finished (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed for a predetermined period after the display is started. The character used for the notification display is a character having a size larger than the character used for the grant amount display (for example, the character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). Is a character with a size larger than the character used for the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.), and the character used for the grant amount display and the notification display has a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character. (For example, the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.), and the given amount The background image of the specific characters used for display is invisible from the specific area (for example, the background image of the specific characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible from the specific area, etc.). The background image of the specific characters used in the notification display can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the background image of the specific characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH can be visually recognized from the specific area, etc.). A game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. In addition, a display including specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image.

That is, attention is paid to the light emitting mode in which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state at a high rate, whether or not the vibration effect is executed at the execution timing, and whether or not the special vibration effect is executed in association with the execution of the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the game, and the background image is made invisible from the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters, and the characters used for the notification display are used for the given amount display. Since the size of the characters is larger than the characters and the background image can be visually recognized from a specific area, the amount of grant display can always be easily confirmed even though the characters are small, while the notification display indicates that the predetermined amount has been reached. Large characters can be displayed without hiding the background image. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that easily attracts the interest of the player when installed in the game hall, makes it easy for the player to grasp the amount of the added value for the game, and easily recognizes that the predetermined amount has been reached.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of a game and can preferably display a display including a specific character in relation to a background image, it is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.) and a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device). The display area 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51). The background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 has the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. , The background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed, etc.), In the second display area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the background image. Yes (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and at least the first display area. In the first, as a notification display on the front side of the background image to notify that the amount of game value to be added has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification that the amount of game value to be added has reached the first predetermined amount. It is possible to display a notification display and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be imparted has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 has at least in the first display area 20SH51. On the front side of the background image, the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state is "1000" as the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when "pieces" are reached, and when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 pieces", the acquisition number of "2000 over" is obtained. The number notification display can be displayed, etc.), and the grant amount display is updated every time the gaming value is granted in the advantageous state (eg, the number notification display can be displayed). For example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), and the notification display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display. (For example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display, etc.), and the characters used for the notification display are more than the characters used for the grant amount display. Is also a large size character (for example, the character used for the acquired number display 20SHKH is a character larger than the character used for the acquired number display 20SHK), and is used for the grant amount display and the notification display. The characters used include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH are surrounded by the lines forming the characters. The specific characters used for the given amount display are invisible from the specific area (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK). The background image of the specific character is invisible from the specific area, etc.), and the background image of the specific character used for the notification display is visible from the specific area (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH). Specific characters used include game machines (for example, the background image can be visually recognized from a specific area). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(Explanation of feature 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of balls acquired after a predetermined period in which the attacker is in the open state in the first round game, and the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of balls won has not increased is displayed, and if the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which includes a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, and other game effect lamps 9 are all turned on. It is a figure. In the feature portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), game effect lamp 9 such as general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, lights in sequence from lower left to lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he should hit right.

FIG. 13-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 13-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It should be stored in. After that, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step 042AKS004). In addition, a setting for ending the probability change state and the time saving state is made (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn off the state, a process of clearing the special figure fluctuation counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the like are performed. It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, the setting for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made in the same manner as the process of step 042AKS003 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to turn it off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

If the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). .. After executing any of the processes of step 042AKS011 and step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the probability change state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation count counter (special figure fluctuation count value) is updated by, for example, 1 subtraction or 1 addition, and the updated special figure fluctuation count value is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability change state or the time reduction state may be ended and the normal state may be controlled by clearing the probability change flag or the time reduction flag to turn it off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag may be maintained, and the process of step 042AKS013 may be completed. After executing the end determination of the probability change state or the time saving state, the special symbol stop process ends. It should be noted that the end determination based on the special figure fluctuation count value may be performed only when the time is shortened, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit". .. Alternatively, for example, the probability change state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the RAM 102 and referring to the probability change state end determination table previously stored in the ROM 101 or the like. It may be decided whether or not to do so.

FIG. 13-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the big hit opening pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 13-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 6 in response to the jackpot flag being on. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start effect is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process in step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set. Set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, it is determined that the jackpot start effect is waiting in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, "0"). , Corresponding to the match, it may be determined that the production is not waiting at the start of the big hit.

If the jackpot start effect is waiting in step 042AKS022, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value (step 042AKS023), the jackpot opening pre-processing ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot start production is not waiting in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the jackpot opening count counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read out (step 042AKS026), and the release control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, a common open control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. For example, when there is a jackpot type of "probability", a jackpot of "probability change" or "non-probability change" It may be set to an open control pattern different from the type. Further, even if the jackpot type is "probability variation" or "non-probability variation", different opening control patterns are set depending on the jackpot type, for example, the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2" are set to different opening control patterns. It may be set in a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting for opening the large winning opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next open waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next open wait end is in progress, but if they match. If this is the case, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for opening next time. If the next opening standby is in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process proceeds to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 13-2, or the post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 of FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not waiting (step 042AKS027; No), the large winning opening is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large winning opening opening counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a large prize formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed by setting a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the large winning opening opening time in the game control process timer. The large winning opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for opening the mouth, is set. Further, for example, the solenoid drive signal for the predetermined large winning opening door is started to be output via the predetermined solenoid circuit, so that the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on. The state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value in the large winning opening opening counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is the game control process timer. Is set to.

Then, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the value of the special figure process flag is updated by adding 1 to the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the big hit. After updating to 5 ”(step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening is completed.

FIG. 13-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the process during the opening of the jackpot. In the process during the jackpot opening shown in FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has been won in the jackpot by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If there is no winning of the game ball in the large winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if there is a winning of the game ball to the big winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates by adding 1 to the winning number count value, and the game ball is the big winning opening. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value is not a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is subtracted by 1 and updated (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process of opening the large winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045. When it is determined (step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined solenoid for the winning opening door is stopped via the predetermined solenoid circuit to close the winning opening. The solenoid for the large winning opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the designated command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is set after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6", which is a value corresponding to the processing (step 042AKS049), the processing during the jackpot opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 13-2, the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 13-3, the jackpot opening processing shown in FIG. 13-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening post-processing and the jackpot end processing). Is executed to set transmission of various effect control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning opening open designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning opening post-opening designation command. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the effect control command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , The timing of each timing such as the start of the big hit, the opening and closing of the big winning opening (start of the round) and the closing (the end of the round), the winning of the big winning opening and the end of the big hit, etc. is grasped.

FIG. 13-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed in the jackpot middle effect processing of step S176 of FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 13-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). When it is determined in the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 of FIG. 6 that the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit execution number, the hit end designation command is executed on the main board. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the big hit middle effect and executing the ending effect.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (the nR predetermined period has elapsed). Determine (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1", which is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066 described later, and cleared to "1" in step 042AKS066. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and when the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nR round. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the big prize opening is completely open (it is detected that the big winning door has moved to the position where it is completely open). The designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is transmitted, and the timer value for a predetermined period may be counted from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game of the first round, the number of acquired balls is displayed and the number of rounds is indicated. The display is done. On the side of the production control board 12, the number of acquisitions is obtained each time a winning designation command indicating that the game ball has won a prize is received in the big winning opening during the period from the big hit to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending). Is continuously added by 15. When the effect control board 12 receives the prize designation command, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the number of acquisitions, and display the added number of acquisitions. It takes a predetermined period to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be in time for the winning from the start of the round game of the first round until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of acquisitions. , The process of displaying "0015" may not catch up even though the prize is won (it becomes "0015" after "0000" is displayed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is provided and the game ball existing at the upper part of the large winning opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period in which "0015" is directly displayed without displaying "0000" as the number of acquisitions is secured. On the other hand, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when continuously firing, and the period from firing to winning the grand prize opening is set. Even if it is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously fired game balls to win a prize in the large winning opening is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the large winning opening is one from the opening of the large winning opening to the display of the number of winnings. Therefore, by increasing the number of winnings in the state before the number of acquisitions and the number of rounds are displayed, it is possible to prevent the number of acquisitions from being displayed at the timing when the number of rounds is displayed and to give the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although the predetermined period in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is set to "1", and 1 is sequentially added in the process of step 042AKS066, and "1" is added in step 042AKS068. Cleared to. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n = 1 by confirming the value of n.

When it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect suggesting that the player should hit right, and suggests that the player is in a big hit game state. The operation of the fanfare effect is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R, displays the number of acquisitions, and displays the number of acquisitions, and the n-1R. (Step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation control of the big hit middle effect corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and a predetermined song or sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production of outputting is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS056). In the process of step 042AKS056, the winning is determined from the start of the nR to the predetermined period. When the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when the winning opening is won by the predetermined period from the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winning balls. Is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the process of step 042AKS057 or the process of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of balls won is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive villa, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "big hit", that is, at the end timing of the consecutive villa. .. After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). The light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is, for example, more than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the big hit production (winning prize). It emits light in an aspect of notifying that it has been done. Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and the game interest can be improved. As for the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of light emission per unit time may be larger at the time of winning and at the time of producing during the big hit. When a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period, and a winning sound is output. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (1st R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). ). If n = 1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated as they are. On the other hand, if n ≠ 1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the update display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the acquired number of balls added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as it is, but is shown in FIG. 13-. As shown in 12 (a-23), the count-up display (notification display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls to be acquired increases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 13-5 that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. And, at the same time, the operation control of the effect during the big hit of the nR is performed (step 042AKS061). When n = 1, that is, in the case of the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a prize before the elapse of the predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed in the step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is added by "15" in step 042AKS057. Therefore, in step 042AKS061, FIG. 13-11 (a-20). ) Is displayed to count up (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then as shown in FIG. 13-11 (a-21), the number of acquisitions has not increased in this big hit. The number of acquisitions (as a specific display) is displayed (display of "0015"), which is different from the predetermined display indicating You can do it after the upload). On the other hand, if the game ball has not won the big prize opening before the lapse of the predetermined period, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in this big hit. Therefore, FIG. 13-11 (a) As shown in -22), as a predetermined display, the number of acquisitions (display of "0000") indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased is displayed (if it is in a consecutive villa, the number of acquisitions at the time of the previous big hit remains the same. You can display it). In addition to "0000" as the display of the number of acquisitions (predetermined display) indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased, a display other than a number such as "---" or "not increased" is performed. You may do so. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and predetermined music and sound are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production of outputting is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance. In this way, during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in the situation where the number of winnings is not displayed, only the attacker lamp 9c lights up when the game ball wins the large winning opening. However, in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately alternated. Is turned on, and more effect lamps 9 are emitted than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and after the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. The production can be lively and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the effect lamp 9 is emitted at the same timing as the execution timing of the big hit middle effect, the effect can be excited at once at the timing when the big hit medium effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063). The attacker playing card 9c is made to emit light, the winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, the count-up is displayed (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. The number of acquisitions is updated. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or when the prize designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), has the effect control CPU 120 started the next round of the nR, the n + 1R? It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined whether or not a designated command during opening of the large winning opening indicating the start of the n + 1R is received from the side of the main board 11. When the n + 1R has not started, that is, when the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening has not been received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. .. On the other hand, when the n + 1R starts, that is, when a designated command indicating the start of the n + 1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), after adding n by "1" (step 042AKS066), various display processes To finish. For example, when n = 1, that is, in the first round, n = 2 in step 042AKS066. Although n = 2 and the second round, until the predetermined period elapses, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round which is the n-1R. The round display is performed, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after being determined as Yes in step 042AKS052, it is displayed in the process of step 042AKS061).

When it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the big hit middle effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS051). 042AKS067), clear n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and end various display processes.

Subsequently, display timings such as round number display and acquisition number display and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 13-6 to 13-14. In the illustrated example, the case of the so-called first hit (first big hit) is shown, not in the consecutive villas.

FIG. 13-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the large winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 13-7 to 13-14 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. As shown in FIGS. 13-6 and 13-7 (a-1), when the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game state is reached. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (b-1), the large winning opening is closed. Further, in order to notify the player that a big hit has occurred, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (c-1), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamp 9eL, Various effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When it becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 13-6, a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect are performed to notify the player that the player should hit right until the predetermined period of the first round ends (Fig. 13-). Step 042AKS054) of step 5. The period from the jackpot shown in FIG. 13-6 to the start of the first R is a sufficiently longer period than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (a-2), the effect image of the fanfare is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (c-2). All effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamp 9 is turned on in the order of the lower left side, the upper left side, the central portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and the right-handed effect of displaying "right-handed" on the image display device is performed. The small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 13-7 (a-2) may be continuously displayed during the big hit game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (a-3) to 13-10 (a-19), in the image display device 5, the “right-handed” image is superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamp 9 will be described below. When the right-handed effect is started, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided in the lower left of the game area is first lit, and then FIG. 13-7 (Fig. 13-7). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is lit, and then the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is turned on. As shown in FIG. 13-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 13-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion. 9eL lights up. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 13-8 (b-7), since the large winning opening is closed, the launched game medium does not win the large winning opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 13-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the launched game ball passes through the second path of the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the upper center portion of the game board 2 is turned on, and FIG. 13-8 (c-9). ), The main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 is lit, so that the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper center portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is lit.

Next, the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion is turned on as shown in FIG. 13-8 (c-10), and then the frame lamp in the upper right portion is lit as shown in FIG. 13-8 (c-11). The upper right lamp 9bR2, which is No. 9, is lit, and as shown in FIG. 13-8 (c-12), the right display device of the display device lower lamp 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2. The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1 which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part is lit, and the attacker lamp 9c provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 is lit. do. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the effect lamp 9 lights up in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the central part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side, so that the effect lamp 9 hits the player right. Right-handed production will be performed to suggest. In this example, an example is shown in which both the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest right-handed striking. It may be. Further, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights from the lower left side to the center and the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights from the lower left side to the center and right. Both may be lit independently at the same time or with a time lag, such as lighting in the downward direction.

After the right-handed effect of the effect lamps 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 13-9 (c-15). As shown in FIG. 13-9 (a-15), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed (the right-handed effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the opening timing of the large winning opening is reached as shown in FIG. 13-6, the first R is started, and the large winning opening is opened as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-16). At this stage, right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed as shown in FIG. 13-10 (a-16), and is shown in FIG. 13-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period elapses. As such, all effect lamps 9 remain off (same until FIGS. 13-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indexes such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set to be lower than usual. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-16), even after the big winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, FIGS. 13-7 (c-3) to 13-9. As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence to suggest right-handed strikes. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the opening of the big winning opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest right-handed hitting, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 13-9 (c-15). You may leave it on as it is without turning it off. According to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening is open.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-17), when the large winning opening is completely opened, the count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R is started, and FIG. 13-10 is started. When the game ball wins the large winning opening as shown in (b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and the winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. It should be noted that the large winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the large winning opening is opened). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it becomes possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R. On the side of the effect control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-18) by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 13-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 13-10 (c-18). As shown in the above, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the prize has been won. As described above, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c is emitted in a manner larger than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light in, for example, the big hit medium effect. In the example shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. An example is shown. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured such that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the large winning opening, and the player's interest in the game is reduced without giving anxiety to the player. Can be prevented.

After the game ball has won the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-18), or after the state shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-17) has not been won, time has passed, and FIG. 13- When the predetermined period elapses as shown in 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19), as shown in FIG. 13-6, the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R is displayed and the jackpot medium effect is produced. Since it is the execution timing and the execution timing of the acquisition number display, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 13-5 is executed.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the large winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-18), as shown in FIG. 13-11 (a-20), the first The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 13-11 (a-20), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed and "BOUNUS" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot and the display of "during BOUNUS" displayed as the jackpot middle production (1st R middle production) are not shown (the same applies to FIGS. 13-20 described later). It is displayed in a manner suggesting that it should be right-handed as shown in 13-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed effect is performed and a predetermined period elapses after the big winning opening is opened, the big hit medium effect is shown in FIG. 13-21. As shown in (A-2), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is displayed in a front-facing manner, and is displayed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A-3), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is tilted toward the right back, and "in BOUNUS" is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the upper part of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A-4), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, faces the front, and a star is placed above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. The shape image shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A-5), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is inclined toward the left back direction, and "U" in the display of "BOUNUS" is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the top of. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A-6), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot again, faces the front, and the star is above the "S" in the "BOUNUUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 13-21 (A-2). In this way, in the big hit medium production, the decorative patterns that make up the big hit are operated in the right back direction, the front, and the left back direction, and a star-shaped image is displayed from the left character of the "BOUNUS middle" display to the right. It suggests to the player that he should hit right by shifting. The operation display of the decorative pattern that composes the jackpot and the transition display of the star-shaped image are called effect display. In addition to this, for example, a predetermined image is rotated clockwise or the character is gradually displayed. Includes indications such as pointing to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed striking. According to this, it is suggested that the right-handed hit should be made by the effect display, and the right-handed hit can be easily recognized.

In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (c-20), the effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the large winning opening is opened and the predetermined period elapses, and FIG. 13 As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as the big hit middle production (1st R middle production), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit are displayed, "BOUNUS" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

Next, as time elapses, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball wins the big winning opening in the first R, the upper limit at which the big winning opening can be opened. It will be a period. Along with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 13-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 13-12 (a-23), and FIG. 13-12 (a-24). As shown in the above, the number of acquired "0150" is displayed. Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 13-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 13-12 (c-23). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner of notifying that a prize has been won. It should be noted that the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the elapse of a predetermined period. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, 10 prizes are sufficiently possible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize opening in the 1st R, the maximum period during which the big winning opening can be opened is reached. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (b-24), the large winning opening is opened. It is controlled to be closed. After that, during the period until the second R shown in FIG. 13-6 is started, the large winning opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 13-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R elapses (from the time when n = 2 until the predetermined period elapses), as shown in FIG. 13-12 (a-25), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed. , The big hit production is continuously performed (the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed according to the winning), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the big hit production as shown in FIG. 13-12 (c-25). Lights up.

In the 1st R, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game ball is controlled. In some cases, a so-called over-winning may occur in which the player wins a prize in the large winning opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 13-12 (a-23), and the number of acquired "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 13-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed to the time before the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that the over-winning has occurred in the first round, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, since the update of the number of acquisitions display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine which prize will be awarded corresponding to the opening of the round. It will be easy. Further, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning sound may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, when the winning value exceeds the upper limit value "10", the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a mode corresponding to over-winning, unlike the light emission in the normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, the timing is such that the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 13-6, and the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 13-13 (b-26). Is controlled to be. At this time, Yes is determined in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 13-5, that is, a command indicating the start of the n + 1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n = 2. Become. At this stage, since the process of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 13-5 is executed, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the jackpot medium effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the first R are performed. The display is made (see also FIG. 13-6).

Next, when the big winning opening is completely opened and the game ball wins the big winning opening as shown in FIG. 13-13 (b-27), the step of FIG. 13-5 is different from the case of the first R. In the process of 042AKS060, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 13-13 (a-27), and the number of acquired "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 13-13 (a-28). Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 13-13 (b-27), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 13-13 (c-27). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up. As described above, in the rounds other than the 1st R, the number of winnings is updated and displayed during the predetermined period even if the prize is won during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second R elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 of FIG. 13-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (a-30), "2R" indicating that the second round is performed. The number of rounds is displayed, and the big hit middle production corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number of "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses. Further, in the feature unit 042AK of this embodiment, an example of executing a common big hit medium effect regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the effect effect lamp 9) is shown, but it is executed in each round. The production during the big hit may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the effect lamp 9. In this way, since the large winning opening is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the player's game ball that has been continuously fired from the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of the plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game balls fired in succession are won in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large winning opening is controlled to be open corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 13-13 (a-29). ), (B-29), and (c-29) show that when a predetermined period has passed without the game ball winning after the large winning opening is completely opened, FIG. 13-14 (a-31). ), (B-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions acquired in the first R is continuously displayed as it is. After that, the same processing is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the hit end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. Set to end. In this way, for the second and subsequent rounds, if the prize is not won during the predetermined period, the number of winnings displayed in the previous round is continuously displayed, while the prize is won during the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of acquired balls to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

For example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIG. 13-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R A game ball wins. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the winner has been won, and after the lapse of the predetermined period, FIGS. 13-11 (a-20) and FIG. As shown in (a-21), after performing the count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquired number display. Further, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will further win a prize during the predetermined period (the second ball may win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period elapses, FIG. 13-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed without displaying "0000" or "0015" as the acquisition number display. According to this, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the game entertainment.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions by the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 13-5 after a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened and the first round is started. Then, if the game ball does not win the big prize opening within the predetermined period after the first round is started, a predetermined display indicating that the number of acquired balls has not increased is performed after the predetermined period, and the first round is performed. If the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the number of acquisitions is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

Further, when the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the first round is started, the effect control CPU 120 directly specifies the number of acquired "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as a notification display that the number of acquisitions will increase if the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the first round is started. , Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command indicating that the large winning opening is open, which is transmitted from the main board 11 side in response to the opening of the large winning opening. Is started, and the number of acquisitions is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period. According to this, since the predetermined period is suitably counted and the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 closes the large winning opening door to guide the launched game ball through the second path of the upper part of the large winning opening door to the discharge path. By opening the winning opening door, the launched game ball is guided to the large winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured such that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. .. According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the game is enjoyed without giving the player anxiety. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-6, the effect control CPU 120 strikes right as shown in FIG. 13-7 (a-3) between the time when the big hit is reached and the time when the big winning opening is opened. By performing the production, the player is informed that he / she should hit right. According to this, since the game area to be launched during the big hit is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the large winning opening is a state in which the large winning opening is completely open, that is, the large winning opening is moved to a position where the large winning opening is completely open, and the large winning opening is opened. A command for specifying that the large winning opening is open is transmitted from the side of the main board 11 in response to the detection that the position has been moved to the completely open state. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the big winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) that was launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the big winning opening is open). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R. The number of acquisitions is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game ball hit early from being wasted.

Further, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIG. 13-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R The winning of the game ball occurs, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions as a specific display after the lapse of the predetermined period. According to this, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the game is in a big hit game state from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening. Then, after the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of winnings, and it is possible to perform a big hit middle production corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is used when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. As shown in FIG. 13-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp is also shown in FIG. 13-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and it is possible to visually recognize that the prize has been won within the predetermined period. It will be easier.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 13-5 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), for example, a unit of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the big hit medium effect. Light is emitted in a mode that is greater than the number of light emission per hour (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won). According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is concerned when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. Outputs the winning sound corresponding to the winning. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the first and subsequent rounds in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 13-5 after a predetermined period after the round is started. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

Further, when the second and subsequent round games are performed, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure when the game medium does not win the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the big winning opening is opened. As shown in 13-14 (a-31), when the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed, while the game medium wins the large winning opening within the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of winning balls given in response to the winning from the winning number display displayed in the previous round game, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (a-30). According to this, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even after the second round.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, for example, even when an over-winning occurs, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 13-12 (a-23), and the number of acquired "0165" is displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 13-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed to the time before the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. According to this, since the update of the acquired number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquired number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (c-18), the game is played during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed. Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball wins the big prize opening, in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIGS. 13-11 (c-20) and ( As shown in c-21), the effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after that and improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round, and even after the large winning opening is opened, a predetermined period of time is reached. The effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (c-3) to 13-9 (c-13) to suggest right-handed strikes, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As shown in FIGS. 13-11 (c-20) and (c-21), for example, the effect lamp 9 provided in the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect effect provided in the game board 2. The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed striking by using the effect lamp 9. Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 13-9 (c-15). The lights may be turned on as they are without being turned off as in the above-mentioned manner, and according to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

In addition, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 13-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of winnings is displayed. In addition, the effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is emitted after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Let me. According to this, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect control CPU 120 emits the effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit after the elapse of a predetermined period. Let me. According to this, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production during the big hit is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-21, the effect control CPU 120 suggests right-handed effect display for shifting and displaying a decorative pattern or a star-shaped image constituting a big hit at the timing when the number of acquisitions is displayed. Perform in a mode. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the right side, and the player can easily recognize that the player should hit the right side.

(Modification example of feature part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order, suggesting that the effect lamp 9 should be right-handed. An example is shown in which all the effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed effect by the effect lamp 9 is completed, but this is an example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 13-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), FIGS. 13-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), (c-16A). As shown in FIG. 13-16 (c-16A) at the timing (FIG. 13-16 (b-16A)) when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, the player can easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be continuously lit until a predetermined period elapses or during the opening period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number of "1" in the number of rounds of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in FIG. 13-17, the display of "1" in the display of "1R" is deleted at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big winning opening is closed. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed, and the round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings that is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit winning number is 10). For example, the upper limit winning is set to 1. , If two pieces are entered during the predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over prize may be given. In this case, as the over-winning winning sound during the predetermined period, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over-winning sound) may be output, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over-winning. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, an example of counting the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is shown for displaying the number of acquisitions, but in addition to this, the winning to the general winning opening 10 during the big hit is also counted. May be good. Since right-handed hits are made during the big hit, the general winning opening for winning is the general winning opening 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 13-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 during the big hit. The same part as in FIG. 13-5 will not be described.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 13-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the prize designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), a general prize indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the general prize opening 10 is further obtained. It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS081; Yes). Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS059. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Further, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 13-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether or not the general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS083; Yes). Step 042AKS083), the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (step 042AKS085). Even when the acquisition number update display in step 042AKS085 is performed, the acquisition number display is performed after the count-up display (notification display that the acquisition number increases) is performed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS065. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-19 and 13-20. 13-19 and 13-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. (A-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in FIG. 13-19 are shown in FIG. 13-10 ( The same applies to a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, the counting of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball wins the general winning opening 10, the state shifts to the states shown in FIGS. 13-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 as shown in FIG. 13-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in FIG. 13-19 (b-17), the game ball is also generally used in the large winning opening. When time elapses without winning the winning opening 10 and a predetermined period elapses as shown in FIGS. 13-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball wins a general prize. When a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 13-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 13-20 (a-20A). , The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 13-20 (a-20A), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed or "BOUNUS is in progress" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (c-20A), the effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of acquisitions.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the general winning opening 10, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (a-22A), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as the big hit middle production (1st R middle production), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit are displayed, "BOUNUS" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

As described above, even when the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined setting is the same as in the above embodiment. After the elapse of the period, "0003" is displayed as the number of winnings in response to the winning of the general winning opening 10. Further, when the game ball is not won in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball is not given. Therefore, since the number of winnings corresponding to the winning is displayed also for the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game), and the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game). (For example, the number of acquisitions is displayed), when the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. After the lapse of time, the grant amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the gaming medium is the variable winning means within the predetermined period. If the player does not win a prize, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of acquisitions), and the above. When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.), which is characteristic.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display. (For example, "0015" may be displayed instead of "0000").

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is given the gaming value when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. After performing the count-up display indicating the above, the display according to the gaming value given as the specific display is performed (for example, the count-up display which is a notification display that the number of acquisitions increases is performed, and then “0015”. , Etc.), may be done.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means is a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. After the predetermined period elapses after reception, the display of the grant amount display is started (for example, counting of the timer value for the predetermined period is started from the timing when the designated command for opening the large winning opening sent from the main board 11 side is received. Etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is suitably counted and the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means is the first path (for example, large) that guides the game medium to the winning path by being in the first state. By opening the winning opening door, the launched game ball passes through the first path and leads to the big winning opening, etc.), and in the second state, the game medium is guided to the discharge path. A route forming means including two routes (for example, by closing the grand prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided to the discharge route by passing through the second route of the upper part of the grand prize opening door). And a detection means (for example, a count switch 23) formed in the winning path to detect the winning of the gaming medium, and the time from the path forming means to the detecting means of the gaming medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the player can enjoy the game without giving anxiety. It is possible to prevent a decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means becomes the first state, the player is asked. A game is played by performing an operation promotion display that promotes operation (for example, between the time when a big hit is reached and the time when the big winning opening is opened, a right-handed effect is performed as shown in FIG. 13-7 (a-3). (For example, to indicate to the person what should be right-handed).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example,). The open state of the large winning opening is a state in which the large winning opening is completely open, that is, the large winning opening is moved to a position where the large winning opening is completely open, and the large winning opening is opened. In response to the detection that the machine has moved to a completely open state, a command for specifying that the large winning opening is open is transmitted from the side of the main board 11).

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation promotion display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the launched gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, a gaming ball launched by performing a right-handed effect before the first R is started). However, it is possible to win a prize at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and if a prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of winnings is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medium launched before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means is the first. When the state changes from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium sandwiched (for example, in the final round, as shown in FIG. 13-15, the eleventh game ball is a special variable winning ball. The first round game when the device 7 (more specifically, the big hit game state ends while being sandwiched between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a) is controlled again to the advantageous state. When the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state and the gaming medium in the sandwiched state wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period ( For example, in the case of the next big hit, the game ball wins the big winning opening at the start of the first R, and after a predetermined period of time, the number of acquisitions is displayed as a specific display).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, until the variable winning means is controlled from the advantageous state and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the machine is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect suggesting that the game is in a big hit game state from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening). (It is possible, etc.), along with the start of the display of the grant amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the round game display capable of identifying the round game being executed and the in-round effect corresponding to the round game. (For example, after the big winning opening is open and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds can be displayed together with the number of winnings, and a big hit middle production corresponding to the round game can be executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 043AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. When,
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state (for example). The display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, acquisition). When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed (such as displaying a number), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. The grant amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the predetermined period is displayed. When the game medium wins the variable winning means, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display). Further, the light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9 or the like) and the light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the like) are further provided. The light emitting means is controlled by a light emitting pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium depending on whether the variable winning means is won or the game medium wins the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period).

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the prize is won within the predetermined period. Is easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins the variable winning means. Etc.) and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and the light emission of the specific light emitting means when the game medium wins the variable winning means. A game other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light from the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (similarly to step 042AKS064) in a production during a big hit. The effect lamp 9 may emit light in a manner larger than the number of times of light emission per unit time (such as in a mode of notifying that a prize has been won).

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above is further provided with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is used when the gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means. The winning sound corresponding to the winning is output to, and the winning is performed even when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means after the elapse of the predetermined period or when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means before the elapse of the predetermined period. A sound may be output (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, a winning sound is output regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 044AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 044AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game), and the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the gaming value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game). It is possible to display a round game display that can identify the round game being executed (for example, display the number of rounds), and the first round of the multiple round games. When the game is played, the grant amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are displayed after a lapse of a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of winnings are displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the second and subsequent rounds of the multiple games are displayed. When the game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second and subsequent round games is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and if the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the predetermined period After the lapse of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the granted amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquired number display), and the gaming medium is variable within the predetermined period. When a prize is won in the winning means, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display) after the lapse of the predetermined period.

According to this configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games. , It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the second and subsequent round games are performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means, the grant amount display displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed (for example, when the second and subsequent round games are performed). If the game medium does not win the big prize opening within a predetermined period after the big winning opening is opened, it is displayed in the previous round game as shown in FIG. 13-14 (a-31). When the second and subsequent round games are performed, the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state within a predetermined period. When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the grant amount corresponding to the prize is added from the grant amount display displayed in the previous round game. (For example, when the game medium wins the big winning opening within a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (a-30), the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is displayed. , The number of balls won in response to the winning prize is added and displayed).

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the large winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means can update and display the given amount display being displayed in response to the winning of the game medium in the variable winning means. Yes, the update display of the grant amount display ends after the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state and then changes to the first state again (for example, the large winning opening is completely closed). The count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the closing to the opening state corresponding to the second R).

According to this configuration, since the update of the acquisition number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquisition number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning. ..

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 045AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 045AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game), and the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game). (For example, the number of acquisitions is displayed), when the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. After the lapse of time, the grant amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the gaming medium is the variable winning means within the predetermined period. If the player does not win a prize, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the above. When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. , Etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9 and the like), and a light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 and the like), and the light emitting control means is the variable winning means. Is in the first state and the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the variable winning means is in the first state and the grant amount display before the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. Is controlled to emit light more than when is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the acquired number is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (c-18)). , Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball wins the big prize opening, the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. In this situation, for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the effect lamps 9 and the game board 2 provided in the frame 3 for the multi-game machine are provided. The effect lamps 9 are turned on alternately to emit more light from the effect lamps 9 than during a predetermined period).

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after the event is performed and improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, an operation promotion display for encouraging the player to operate is displayed after the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state. It is possible (for example, right-handed display is performed), and the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c or the like) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means. ) And a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, the said before the elapse of the predetermined period. When the imparted amount display is not displayed, the predetermined light emitting means is made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the operation promotion display while the specific light emitting means is made to emit light, and the given amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed. When there is, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, FIG. 13-7 (c-3). )-As shown in FIGS. 13-9 (c-13), the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on to suggest right-handed strikes, and after a predetermined period of time, for example, FIGS. 13-11 (c-20) and (c). As shown in -21), the effect lamps 9 provided on the double-game machine frame 3 and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 were alternately turned on, and the large winning opening was opened. Later, when the effect lamps 9 are turned on in sequence to suggest a right-handed strike, after the attacker lamp 9c that is turned on last is turned on, the lamps are not turned off as shown in FIG. 13-9 (c-15), and are left as they are. Etc.), you may do so.

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, in the round game, one of the round games is completed by winning a specific number of game media, and the game shifts to the next round game. (For example, the maximum period during which the large winning opening can be opened by winning 10 gaming balls is reached.) The time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state is It is a sufficient time for the gaming medium to win the specified number (for example, for the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count after a predetermined period for 10 gaming balls to win a prize. (For example, during a long period of time).

According to this configuration, a sufficient time is secured for winning, so that the player can feel reassured.

(4) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, in the round game, one round game is completed when a specific number of game media wins a prize, and the game shifts to the next round game (for example, 10 machines). The game medium is the time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state. It is a sufficient time for a specific number of prizes to be won (for example, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, when the grant amount display before the lapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the grant after the lapse of the predetermined period is performed. After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of winnings is displayed, FIGS. 13-9 (c-16) to ( As shown in c-19), the effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. (For example, the effect lamp 9 is made to emit light).

According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting quickly and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests (for example, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect), and a round game that can identify the round game being executed at the same time as the display of the grant amount display is started after the lapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to execute the display and the effect during the round corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds is displayed, the number of acquisitions is displayed, and the effect during the jackpot is performed after a predetermined period of time), which is the same as the execution timing of the effect during the round. The light emitting means is made to emit light at the timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit). , You may do so.

According to this configuration, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production is executed during the round, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, a general winning means (for example, a general winning opening 10) capable of winning a prize in a game medium is further provided, and the display means is described as described above. It is possible to display the amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the general winning means as the given amount display (for example, the winning number display is displayed in response to the winning of the general winning opening 10). If the gaming medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (such as). For example, if the game ball does not win in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball has not been given), and the game medium is displayed within the predetermined period. When a prize is won in the general prize-winning means, a display corresponding to the prize in the general prize-winning means is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 10, after the lapse of the predetermined period, "0003" is displayed as the number of winnings in response to the winning in the general winning opening 10). May be good.

According to this configuration, even when the general winning means is won during the predetermined period, the display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means is displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in a gaming area (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 is placed in a gaming area on the right side). The display means can display a first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the imparted amount display, and the first image is in the advantageous state. The effect is displayed at the same timing as the imparted amount display (for example, the effect display for operating the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot is performed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner suggesting the predetermined area (for example, the effect display). The decorative pattern constituting the jackpot may be moved in the right-back direction, the front, and the left-back direction to be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed hitting).

According to this configuration, the effect display suggests a game area to be fired, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game area to be fired.

(Explanation of First Form of Feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is displayed, and the number of prize balls granted in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number. It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display and. The characters used in the acquired number display and the acquired number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for displaying the acquired number, the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area. As for the specific characters used in the acquired number notification display, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-1 is a diagram showing a background technique related to the first form of the feature portion 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 14-1 (A), the pachinko gaming machine may display the number of winnings displayed with respect to the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 14-1 (A), the number of acquired balls is displayed as "point 120" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

In the winning number display, a number for displaying the number of prize balls and a character other than the number for recognizing that the winning number is displayed are used. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. In the display of the number of acquisitions shown in FIG. 14-1 (A), the characters "point" for recognizing that the display is the number of acquisitions and the number "120" for displaying the number of prize balls are displayed. It is used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by a line forming a character and does not lead to an area outside the line forming the character. Here, "not connected to the area outside the line forming the character" means that the "specific area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the line forming the character" by the "line forming the character". And when the "specific area" is not completely separated from the "area outside the line that forms the character" by the "line that forms the character", but at first glance it appears to be a different area. ,including. In the following description, a character in which a specific area is formed is referred to as a "specific character".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", a substantially circular area surrounded by a curve forming a character is a specific area. The Arabic numeral "8" forms two specific regions. In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the triangular area surrounded by the three straight lines forming the character is the specific area.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 14-1 (A), the pachinko gaming machine displays a background image of the jackpot game state related to the jackpot gaming state in the entire display area of the image display device. do. In the example shown in FIG. 14-1 (A), a background image during a big hit in which a "butterfly" is flying is displayed. The big hit medium background image is an image displayed on the back side of the other displays displayed on the image display device in the big hit game state. The background image during the jackpot contains many lines expressing animation pictures and effects.

The acquired number display is displayed small in the edge area in the display area of the image display device, which does not impair the visibility of the background image during the big hit. If the big hit medium background image changes over time, the line of the big hit medium background image may overlap the back of the acquired number display. Then, when a specific character is displayed on the acquired number display, a big hit is made on the back surface of the specific area of the specific character as shown by the "0" part of the Arabic numeral surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 14-1 (A). When the lines of the middle background image overlap, the lines of the big hit middle background image may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific characters, and the specific characters may appear different from the original characters.

FIG. 14-1 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 14-1 (A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-1 (A) and 14-1 (A) and (B), the line of "Chou" in the background image of the jackpot overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for displaying the number of acquisitions. The line of "Chou" in the background image during the big hit is assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the character of the acquired number display is mistaken for a character different from the original character, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the big hit medium background image so that the line of the big hit medium background image does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The first form of the feature portion 20SH is made in view of such a background. Hereinafter, the first form of the feature unit 20SH will be described.

(Display of the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-2 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

In the first form of the feature unit 20SH, among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific character is , It is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 forming characters. In the example shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS1 used for displaying the number of acquisitions is "black", whereas "0", "4", and "6" corresponding to specific characters are used. , "8", "9", the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white".

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character, and the character is displayed to such an extent that the specific area 20SHI1 and the line 20SHS1 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Among the characters used to display the number of winnings, the numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the number of prize balls and the specific characters among the characters other than the numbers for recognizing that the number of winnings is displayed are also shown in Fig. 14-. Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2 (A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Display of acquired number notification in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-2 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for the acquisition number notification display in the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

When the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display for notifying that fact.

Here, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are the jackpot game states before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed or the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. However, for example, the number of time reduction control and probability variation control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high amount executed after the jackpot game state ends. The certainty control and the time saving control may be continuously executed after the end of the big hit game state until the big hit occurs again. In such a case, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the consecutive villa state, when the number of prize balls given in the multiple big hit game states in the consecutive villa state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display for notifying that fact. do.

In the acquisition number notification display, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state is reached, a number other than a number for displaying the predetermined number and a character other than the number for recognizing that the acquisition number notification display is used. And are used. The numbers used for displaying the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), the specific area of the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), among the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters are specified. Region 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches, it is a number other than the Arabic numeral for displaying the predetermined number, or the acquisition number notification display. As for the specific characters among the characters other than the numbers to be recognized, the specific area is displayed in a transparent display mode as in the Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 14-2 (B).

(How to see the acquired number display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-3 (A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH is displayed. FIG. 14-3 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 14-1 (A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-3 (A) and 14-3 (B), the "butterfly" line of the big hit medium background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the line 20SHHS of the "butterfly" in the background image during the big hit is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately regarded as the Arabic numeral "0". Can be recognized.

In addition to the acquired number display 20SHK, the image display device 5 has a jackpot display 20SHO for recognizing that the jackpot game state is controlled, and a jackpot combination displayed when the jackpot game state is controlled. The decorative symbol display 20SHZ indicating the fixed decorative symbol, the round number display 20SHR indicating the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot game state, and the right-handed display 20SHM suggesting that the player should hit right are displayed. Has been done. The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also located in the edge area in the display area of the image display device 5 that does not impair the visibility of the background image during the jackpot, as in the acquisition number display 20SHK. It is displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are the same types of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number display. Characters of a type different from the characters used for the numerical notification display may be included. In this embodiment, "number" and "katakana" are used as the characters of the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH as shown in FIG. 14-4. On the other hand, in the jackpot display 20SHO, "alphabet" and "kanji", which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display, are used. Further, in the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, "number" which is the same kind of character as the character used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display is used. Further, the round number display 20SHR is different from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, which are the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. "Alphabet", which is a kind of character, is used. Further, in the right-handed display 20SHM, "Kanji", "Hiragana", and "Symbol", which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display, are used.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific area of the specific character used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM is also a non-transparent display mode and the characters are displayed in the same manner as the specific area 20SHI1 of the acquired number display 20SHK. Since the line 20SHS1 to be formed is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-4 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51, which is the first display area. Various displays are performed by distinguishing the second display area 20SH 52, which is narrower than the 20SH 51. In the example shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), the region inside the alternate long and short dash line is the first display area 20SH51, and the region outside the alternate long and short dash line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays a big hit medium background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number display 20SHK on the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), a jackpot display, a decorative symbol display, a round number display, and a right-handed display are also displayed in the second display area 20SH52.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when the game balls enter the large winning opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 14-4 (A), since the acquired number display 20SHK with "point 990" is displayed, it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The effect control CPU 120 updates the number of the acquired number display 20SHK every time the game ball is paid out in the big hit game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that a game ball enters the large prize opening and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 14-4 (B) to (G), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquired numbers 20SHK from "990" in response to the 15 game balls being paid out. Count up to "1005" one by one. In that case, the number of the acquired number display 20SHK goes through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a good number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the big hit game state. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", and the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state is "2000". Is displayed, the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over" is displayed.

When the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes “1000” of Kiriban, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the acquired number to the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-4 (D). Display 20 A part of SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-4 (E) to (G), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in each frame of the image while the number of the acquired number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes "1005", the effect control CPU 120 has the acquired number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-4 (G). Notification display 20 SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

By such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses after the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is started, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 14-4 (H), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move towards the left edge of the area.

By such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and the display is displayed because it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The effect control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is started by displaying a part of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH when the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing. When the predetermined period elapses, the display control for ending the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be performed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is started by stopping and displaying the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and a predetermined period from that timing. The display control for ending the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be performed when the above has elapsed.

As described above, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 14-4 (E) to 14-4 (H), the big hit medium background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 14-4 (E) to 14-4 (H), the background image during the jackpot is visible from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is a specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-4 (D) to (H), the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHK are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK.

The effect mode when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH 51 is not limited to the mode in which the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of the effect of frame-in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be produced so as to pop out from the back side to the front side of the screen, or the acquired number notification display 20SHKH gradually emerges. The effect may be such that the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a balloon indicating the character's dialogue when the character appears. Further, instead of the effect of frame-out the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be sucked from the front side to the back side of the screen, or the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may gradually disappear. The effect may be such that when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in the balloon indicating the character's dialogue, the character leaves.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the big hit middle background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 notifies that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the big hit medium background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the notification display 20SHKH, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state reaches "1000", and the prize balls given in the big hit game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over". Then, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display. The characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHK including the specific character and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH can be suitably displayed in relation to the big hit medium background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, he / she confirms the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in a narrow second display area 20SH52 in small size characters and is specified. If the background image during the big hit is visible from the specific area of the character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but the background image during the big hit cannot be seen from the specific area of the specific character. Therefore, a specific character can be recognized accurately. Further, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the jackpot game state unlike the acquired number display 20SHK, but the game is played when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the person, and since it is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to show the background image during the big hit as much as possible in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Further, as described above, the specific character includes Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals can be suitably displayed in relation to the big hit medium background image.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquired number notification display 20SHKH when displaying the acquired number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped by the acquired number display 20SHK.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH becomes easily noticeable to the player, and it is possible to preferably notify that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". ..

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. Is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are the same types of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and The acquired number notification display 20 includes characters of a type different from the characters used in SHKH, and each type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed. As for the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the specific characters can be accurately recognized even for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the second form of the feature portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-5 to 14-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH, the specific character used for the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is a specific area with respect to the area of the line forming the character, rather than the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK. The proportion of the size of the part is small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Display of acquired number notification in the second form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-5 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for the acquisition number notification display in the second embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH uses three-dimensional characters for the acquisition number notification display. Here, the three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear as if it protrudes to the front side. The area of the line forming the three-dimensional character includes the area 20SHS21 for expressing the character and the area 20SHS22 for expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 14-5 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when the specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in front of the big hit medium background image, the big hit medium background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters)
FIG. 14-5 (B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional character and the area of the line forming the three-dimensional character are compared. The size of the area 20SHS21 for expressing characters is the same. Then, in the non-three-dimensional specific character, the region surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the line region 20SHI1 forming the character becomes the specific region 20SHI1. On the other hand, in a three-dimensional specific character, since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character, it is located on the outline of the inner circumference of the area 20SHS21 expressing the character and the inner circumference side thereof. The outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character and the area surrounded by the area are the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number notification display is the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character on the inner peripheral side of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character, rather than the non-three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number display. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is small.

(A modified example of the acquired number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-6 (A) is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-6 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters. When the specific area 20SHI4 of the above is displayed in "white" and displayed in front of the big hit medium background image, the big hit medium background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in 1 in the modified example)
FIG. 14-6 (B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification in the first modification.

Also in the first modification, when the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification are compared, the size of the line region 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional character and the three-dimensional character are formed. The size of the area 20SH31 that expresses the characters in the area of the line is the same. Then, in the non-three-dimensional specific character, the region surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the line region 20SHI1 forming the character becomes the specific region 20SHI1. On the other hand, in a three-dimensional specific character, since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the area 20SH31 expressing the character and the character on the inner circumference side thereof. The outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character and the area surrounded by the area 20SH32 are the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number notification display is the area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character located on the inner peripheral side of the character expressing area 20SH31 than the non-three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number display. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size of the character, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is small.

(A modified example of the acquired number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-7 (A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), the characters used for the acquisition number notification display have the area of the line forming the characters displayed in a three-color gradation, and the three-color gradation. It is displayed in any of the display modes A to G in which the combinations are different.

The area of the line forming the character of the display mode A is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "red", the central area 20SHSC is "orange", and the lower area 20SHSD is "yellow". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode B is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "orange", the central area 20SHSC is "yellow", and the lower area 20SHSD is "green". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode C is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "yellow", the central area 20SHSC is "green", and the lower area 20SHSD is "light blue". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode D is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "green", the central area 20SHSC is "light blue", and the lower area 20SHSD is "blue". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode E is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "light blue", the central area 20SHSC is "blue", and the lower area 20SHSD is "purple". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode F is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "blue", the central area 20SHSC is "purple", and the lower area 20SHSD is "red". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode G is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "purple", the central area 20SHSC is "red", and the lower area 20SHSD is "yellow".

The image display device 5 displays the mode of the characters used for displaying the acquired number notification as display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → The display is changed over time in the order of ...

FIG. 14-7 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a color change accompanying the operation of the acquired number notification display in the modified example 2.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), the acquired number notification display moves when the acquired number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 (frame-in). The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs depending on whether the frame is out).

In the example shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), the acquired number notification display is moved (framed in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over 0.35 seconds. , The display mode A changes to the display mode D in order. After that, the acquired number display changes in order from the display mode D to the display mode G while being stopped and displayed at the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 for 1 second. After that, the acquired number notification display moves (frames out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds, in order from the display mode G to the display mode C. Change.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the big hit middle background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the background image during the big hit in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 notifies that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the big hit medium background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As a notification display, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over". Then, the acquired number display is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquired number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display. The characters used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for displaying the acquired number, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. The specific character used for displaying the acquired number notification has a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character than the specific character used for displaying the acquired number.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display including the specific character and the acquired number notification display can be suitably displayed in relation to the big hit medium background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, he / she confirms the number of winnings display, but the number of winnings is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and the specific characters are displayed. If the background image during the big hit is visible from a specific area, the specific character may look different from the original character, but by making the background image during the big hit invisible from the specific area of the specific character, It is possible to accurately recognize a specific character.

The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions are three-dimensional characters. The area of the line forming the three-dimensional character includes an area for expressing the character and an area for expressing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the acquired number notification display.

Further, as described above, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 as the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquired number display, but the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the player when it is done, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 is small, it is possible to suppress the risk of misidentifying the character even if the background image in the big hit is visible from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character, and also the specific area of the specific character. By making the background image in the middle of the big hit visible from 20SHI3, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4 for the specific character used for the acquired number notification display in the modification 1.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquired number display, but the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the player when it is done, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area with respect to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Because the ratio of the size of the characters is small, even if the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area of the specific character, it is not only possible to suppress the discomfort, but also the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the characters from being misidentified.

Further, as described above, in the character used for the acquisition number notification display in the modification 2, the area of the line forming the character is displayed with a gradation of three colors. Then, the image display device 5 displays the mode of the characters used for the acquired number notification display as display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode. The display is changed over time in the order of A → .... Then, when the acquired number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquired number notification display is moving (frame-in / frame-out), the acquired number notification display is displayed. The speed at which the display mode changes is different.

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the acquired number notification display, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Explanation of Third Form of Feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the third form of the feature unit 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-8 to 14-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third aspect of the feature unit 20SH, the ending background image of the specific characters used for the result display can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used for result display)
FIG. 14-8 is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for the result display in the third form of the feature portion 20SH.

When the round game of the final round is completed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes an ending effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image. Further, the image display device 5 displays a result display for notifying the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state when displaying the ending background image.

In the result display, a number for displaying the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and a character other than the number for recognizing the result display are used. The numbers used for the result display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals and the like.

Among the characters used for result display, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the feature unit 20SH, as shown in FIG. 14-8, the specific area of the specific character used for the result display is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 14-8, among the Arabic numerals used for the result display, the specific area 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific character is transparent. It is displayed in the display mode of.

Among the characters used for the result display, the numbers other than the Arabic numerals for displaying the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and the characters other than the numbers for recognizing the result display are also shown in FIG. Specific areas are displayed in a transparent display mode, such as the Arabic numerals shown in −8.

(Various productions in the jackpot game state)
FIG. 14-9 is a diagram showing an example of the production period of various effects in the jackpot game state. FIG. 14-10 is a diagram showing an example of production operation of various effects in the jackpot game state.

When the hold information is stored in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the hold in-house consecutive villa notice suggesting that the hold information is controlled to the jackpot game state in response to the stored hold information. be. For example, in the case of a big hit game state of all 10 rounds, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the 9 rounds of the round game as shown in FIGS. 14-9 and 14-10 (A) to 14-10 (B). At the timing T1 when the round game of 10 rounds, which is a round, is started, the notice of the pending Uchirenso will be started.

When the notice of the consecutive villas on hold is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 corresponds to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state as shown in FIG. 14-10 (B). On the front side of the background image during the big hit, the effect image of the notice of the pending villa is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 14-10 (B), the effect image 20SH of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the notice of the consecutive villas on hold.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 14-10 (B), the "flame" line of the effect image overlaps the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK. Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. Therefore, the line of "flame" in the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0" in the specific area, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". ..

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-9 and 14-10 (B) to 14-10 (C), at the timing T2 when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 is on hold. End the notice of the consecutive villas and start the ending production. When the ending effect is started, the display of the ending background image is started at a predetermined brightness in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 14-10 (C), the ending background image in which the blizzard of cherry blossoms dances is displayed from the back of the screen in the first display area 20SH51. Further, on the front of the ending background image, the characters "big hit end" are displayed corresponding to the end of the big hit game state.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the notice of the pending villa before the display of the ending background image starts at the timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background image is displayed, the effect image 20SHE of the pending villa notice is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the pending villa notice is displayed when the ending background video is not displayed.

The ending background image may be at least an image displayed in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 14-10 (D). It may happen. In the example shown in FIG. 14-10 (D), the blizzard of cherry blossoms displayed as the ending background image is flying over the entire screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-9 and 14-10 (D) to (E), at the timing T3 when the result display is started, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to be higher than the predetermined brightness. The brightness is reduced to a specific darkness, and the progress of the ending background image is paused and displayed as a still image. Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image with a brightness brighter than a specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 14-10 (E), the fluttering cherry blossom blizzard is stationary, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, as for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the specific area 20SHI5 is displayed in a transparent display. Therefore, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

As shown in FIGS. 14-10 (A), (B), and (E), the characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK. Further, the result display 20SHRE may be displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 14-10 (E). There may be things.

(Suggestion of setting by ending background video)
FIG. 14-11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the setting suggestion effect by the ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the jackpot winning probability is changed by using the display result determination table according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", with "1" having the lowest ball output rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The larger the value in the order of, the higher the ball output rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is, the larger the value is in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low setting", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high setting".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third aspect of the feature unit 20SH is configured so that the set value can be changed and the above-mentioned ending background image can be displayed as a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a blizzard of cherry blossoms dances from the back of the screen as shown in FIG. 14-11 (A) when the set value is set low. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of cherry blossom blizzard dances from the left and right cherry blossom trees in full bloom, as shown in FIG. 14-11 (B), when the set value is set high.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion by the ending background image does not have to definitively suggest whether the set value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, the ending background image of the mode shown in FIG. 14-11 (B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, or when the set value is set high. In addition, the ending background image of the aspect shown in FIG. 14-11 (A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low ratio.

Further, the ending background image may have different production modes depending on whether the setting value "6" is the most advantageous for the player and the setting value is not "6". Further, the ending background image may have different production modes depending on whether the setting value is an odd number or an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned notice of the villa in the hold is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for notifying the reliability of the jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect by the notice of the villa in the hold is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the big hit middle background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the big hit game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Further, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the jackpot gaming state in the second display area 20SH52 in response to the hold information stored on the front side of the jackpot medium background image. It is possible to display the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the pending villa, which suggests that it will be done. Further, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 notifies the front side of the ending background image at least in the first display area 20SH51 of the total number of prize balls given in the big hit game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed. As for the specific characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SHRE of the notice of the consecutive villas on hold are invisible from the specific area. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHK including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the consecutive villas on hold, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be displayed. Can be suitably displayed in relation to the ending background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, the acquired number display 20SHK is confirmed, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and is held. Since it may overlap with the effect video 20SHE of the villa notice, if the background video during the big hit or the effect video 20SHE of the pending villa notice is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will look different from the original character. By making the background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SH of the notice of the pending villa invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the pending villa notice, so that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it is possible to show the ending background image as much as possible in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any of a plurality of types of set values "1" to "6" having different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can display the ending background image in a manner suggesting the set set value. The effect video 20SHRE of the notice of the villa in the hold is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for notifying the reliability of the jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect by the notice of the villa in the hold is not executed.

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting suggestion effect by the ending background image is executed. Therefore, it is significant that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific character used for the result display 20SHRE. Increase.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background image at a predetermined brightness. Then, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background image at a specific lightness darker than the predetermined lightness at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE is started, and at a lightness brighter than the specific lightness. Result display 20SHRE is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result display 20SHRE can be improved.

(Explanation of the Fourth Form of Feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-12 to 14-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth aspect of the feature unit 20SH, the remaining number of times of the ST number in the probabilistic state is displayed, and when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times is the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of times is notified. It is possible to display the remaining number of times notification display. The characters used for the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific character used for displaying the remaining number of times, the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. As for the specific character used for the remaining number notification display, the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-12 is a diagram showing a background technique related to the fourth form of the feature portion 20SH.

Basically, a pachinko gaming machine is a game in a normal state rather than a period in which a game is played in an advantageous state when comparing a state advantageous for a player such as a probabilistic state, a time saving state, and a jackpot game state with a normal state. It is designed to have a longer period of time.

For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when the upper limit number of hold information is stored regardless of whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, when the upper limit number of hold information is not stored. It is easier to execute shortened fluctuations with a shorter variable display time. Then, in the probabilistic state accompanied by the time reduction control, since the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, winning is more likely to occur than in the normal state, so that the shortening fluctuation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to advance the game. Therefore, the period during which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period during which the game is played in the probabilistic state accompanied by the time reduction control.

In the probabilistic change control, one of the conditions of the time when the special figure game of a predetermined number of ST times is executed after the end of the big hit game state and the time when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. It ends when you do. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined number of ST times is exhausted. .. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving control is not performed. In the time saving control, one of the conditions that the special figure game of a predetermined number of time saving times is executed after the end of the big hit game state and that the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. It ends when you do. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" when the time reduction control is being performed, the time reduction control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined number of time reductions is exhausted. .. The predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

The set value of the number of STs and the set value of the number of time reductions may be different values.

When the pachinko machine is controlled to the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (A), the pachinko gaming machine may display the remaining number display regarding the remaining number of STs in the probabilistic state. In the example shown in FIG. 14-12 (A), the remaining number display of "30 remaining" is displayed corresponding to the remaining number of STs being 30.

In the remaining number display, a number for displaying the remaining number of ST times and a character other than the number for recognizing that the remaining number is displayed are used. The numbers used for displaying the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The remaining number display shown in FIG. 14-12 (A) includes the characters "remaining" and "times" for recognizing that the remaining number is displayed, and "30" for displaying the remaining number of ST times. And the numbers are used.

Among the characters used for displaying the remaining number of times, there is a specific character in which a specific area is formed.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (A), the background image during ST corresponding to the probabilistic state is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device. do. In the example shown in FIG. 14-12 (A), the background image during ST in a manner in which the screen is cracked is displayed. The background image during ST is an image displayed on the back side of the other display displayed on the image display device in the probabilistic state. The background image during ST contains many lines expressing animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number display is displayed small in the edge area in the display area of the image display device, which does not impair the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern. If the background image during ST changes over time, the line of the background image during ST may overlap the back of the remaining number display. Then, when a specific character is displayed on the remaining number of times display, ST is displayed on the back surface of the specific area of the specific character as shown by the Arabic numeral "0" part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 14-12 (A). When the lines of the middle image overlap, the lines of the background image during ST may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific characters, and the specific characters may appear different from the original characters.

FIG. 14-12 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 14-12 (A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) and 14-12 (B), the line of the ST middle background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the remaining number display, and the ST middle background image. The line is assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" appears to be the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the character of the remaining number display is mistaken for a character different from the original character, the remaining number of ST times in the probabilistic state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the background image during ST so that the line of the background image during ST does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The fourth form of the feature portion 20SH is made in view of such a background, and the fourth form of the feature portion 20SH will be described below.

(Display of the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-13 is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

In the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH, among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific character is , It is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS6 forming characters. In the example shown in FIG. 14-13, the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS6 used for displaying the remaining number of times is "black", whereas "0", "4", "6", and "6" corresponding to specific characters are used. When the specific area 20SHI6 of "8" and "9" is displayed in "white" and displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI6.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the moji, and the characters are displayed to such an extent that the specific area 20SHI6 and the line 20SHS6 forming the characters can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Among the characters used for displaying the remaining number, the numbers other than the Arabic numerals for displaying the remaining number of ST times and the specific characters among the characters other than the numbers for recognizing that the remaining number is displayed are also shown in the figure. Like the Arabic numerals shown in 14-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-14 is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for the remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display for notifying the predetermined number of times.

In the remaining number notification display, when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, a number other than a number for displaying the predetermined number and a character other than a number for recognizing that the remaining number notification display is used. And are used. The numbers used for the remaining number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 14-14, the remaining number notification display is displayed in a plurality of types having different transmittances. The remaining number notification display shown in FIG. 14-14 (A) is a display mode in which the area of the line forming the character of the remaining number notification display is not transparent and the background of the character cannot be seen from the line area. The remaining number notification display shown in FIG. 14-14 (B) is a display mode in which the area of the line forming the character of the remaining number notification display is transparent and the background of the character can be seen from the area of the line.

In addition, the remaining number notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In the display mode in which the background of the character is not visible, the area of the line forming the three-dimensional character includes the area 20SHS71 expressing the character and the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character. In the display mode in which the background of the character is transparent, the area 20SHS71 expressing the character is transparently displayed, and in the display mode in which the background of the character is not visible, the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character is displayed. The area is displayed as the area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIGS. 14-14, among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the remaining number notification display, the specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters. The 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when it is displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

As shown in FIG. 14-14, the specific area 20SHI7 of the remaining number notification display differs depending on whether the remaining number notification display is displayed in a non-transparent mode or a transparent mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 14-14, the remaining number notification display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the character, the area expressing the character. The area surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the 20SHS71 and the outline of the area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the characters located on the inner circumference side thereof is the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 14-14 (B), the remaining number notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 expressing the character is transparently displayed, so that the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character is represented. The region surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the region 20SHS72B is the specific region 20SHI7.

(How the remaining number of times is displayed in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-15 (A) is a diagram showing how the remaining number display is displayed in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH. FIG. 14-15 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 14-15 (A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-15 (A) and 14-15 (B), the line of the background image during ST overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the remaining number display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI6, it is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the background image during ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining number display 20SHST, the image display device 5 displays the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU for recognizing that the image display device 5 is controlled to the probability variation state. There is. The acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU are also displayed small in the edge area in the display area of the image display device 5 that does not impair the visibility of the decorative pattern, as in the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU are the same types of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may contain characters of a different type from the characters to be used. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-17, "number", "hiragana", and "kanji" are used as the characters of the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST. On the other hand, in the probability variation display 20SHRU, an "alphabet" which is a character different from the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST is used. Further, the acquired number display 20SHK includes "numbers" which are the same types of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST, and the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST. Different types of characters, "katakana", are used. In addition, the right-handed display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji", which are the same types of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST, and the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST. "Symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU is also a non-transparent display mode like the specific area 20SHI6 of the remaining number display 20SHST, and the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Since the display mode is different from the display mode, the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of effect operation of remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 14-16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 20SH. FIG. 14-17 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display in the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 14-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays the remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 14-17 (A) to 14-17, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of STs of the remaining number display 20SHST each time the variable display is executed. Let me display it.

As shown in FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17 (A) to 14-17 (B), the effect control CPU 120 starts a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number of times. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying a predetermined number of times is started in a display mode that does not transmit. For example, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the number of times when the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, or 10 times is started. The display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is started to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in FIGS. 14-17 (B) to 14 (D), the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 14-17, the acquired number display 20SHK is also displayed when the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, but the remaining number notification display 20SHST is a display in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17 (B) to 14-17 (C), when the first period elapses after the display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is started, the effect control CPU 120 remains. The display mode of the number-of-times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17 (B) to 14-17 (E), when the second period elapses after changing the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control CPU 120. The display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is terminated.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute variable display based on a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns having different variable display times.

The remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, the remaining number of STs may be misidentified.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first period and the remaining number notification display 20SHST are displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH so that the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in one variable display. The total period with the second period displayed in the transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern having the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, even if the variable display based on any kind of fluctuation pattern is executed, the variable display is executed. In the one variable display, the display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the above-mentioned "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed on the front side of the identification information at least in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transparent remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the display result may not be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first period of displaying in a display mode that does not transmit the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is the type of variation pattern having the shortest variable display time so that the display result of the variable display can be recognized. It is set to end before the timing when the display result in the variable display of is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, even if the variable display based on any kind of fluctuation pattern is executed, the variable display is executed. The display result of the variable display can be preferably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-17 (D), the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is transparent. Since it has changed, the identification information in the background of the character can be visually recognized from the area of the line forming the character of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number notification display 20SHST is displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is transparent when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is a predetermined number, the remaining number of times is temporarily stopped when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth aspect of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to a probabilistic state accompanied by a time saving control capable of advancing the game faster than the normal state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display the remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of STs in the probabilistic state on the front side of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 notifies the remaining number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number on the front side of the background image during ST at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHST, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is 60 times, and the remaining number display 20SHST indicating "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is 50 times. It is possible to display the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "50". Then, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display. The characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHST are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST. The characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. As for the specific characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST, the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST including the specific characters and the remaining number notification display 20SHST can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image during ST. For example, when the player confirms the remaining number of STs in the probabilistic state, he / she confirms the remaining number display 20SHST, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52. If the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of a specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but the background image during ST cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to accurately recognize a specific character. Further, the remaining number notification display 20SHST is not always displayed like the remaining number display 20SHST, but is predetermined in the sense of alerting the player that the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is a predetermined number. It is displayed only for a period of time, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51. Therefore, by making the background image during ST visible from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific characters, the first In the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show the background image during ST as much as possible.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back surface can be seen through the line portion forming the characters. be.

According to such a configuration, the background image can be visually recognized while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being applied to the player.

Further, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative symbol can be visually recognized while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being applied to the player. ..

Further, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display mode transparent to the display.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the acquired number display 20SHK from being lowered due to the display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player determines the game. The present invention is also applied to a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button. It is possible.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). The display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 and the like), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and around the first display area. The area includes a second display area that is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51. The display means includes, for example, a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. The image display device 5 can display (for example, the image display device 5 can display a big hit medium background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and the second display. In the area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. The number of winning balls displayed 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given can be displayed on the front side), and at least in the first display area, the amount of value given for gaming is set to a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. As a notification display for notifying that the value has been reached, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of the game value to be given has reached the first predetermined amount and a notification that the amount of the game value to be given has reached the second predetermined amount. It is possible to display a second notification display to be notified (for example, in the image display device 5, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the front side of the jackpot medium background image. As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" is displayed. It is possible to display, and when the number of prize balls granted in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over", etc.), and the grant amount display is It is updated every time the gaming value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is paid by the gaming ball as a prize ball in the jackpot gaming state. The notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the display was started (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed after the display is started). The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). The characters to be used are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display have a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters to be formed (for example, the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.). The background image of the specific character used for the given amount display is invisible from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK cannot see the background image during the big hit from the specific area. The background image of the specific character used for the notification display can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH can be visually recognized from the jackpot medium background image from the specific area. It is characterized by being possible).

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display and the notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state, he / she confirms the amount of grant, but the amount of grant is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area. , If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, It is possible to accurately recognize a specific character. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the grant amount display, but is meant to congratulate the player when the grant amount of the game value granted in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period, and is displayed in large size characters in a wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character, it is called a first display area. It is possible to show the background image as much as possible at a conspicuous display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the specific character includes the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, 9 (for example, the specific characters are the Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6 ”,“ 8 ”,“ 9 ”, etc.) may be included.

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display and the notification display using Arabic numerals can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the display means displays the notification display when the grant amount display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 is the acquired number). When the display 20SHK is displayed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, it is possible to accurately grasp the amount of the game value given in the jackpot game state by the grant amount display.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3), the display means can display the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image). The display device 5 may display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52).

According to such a configuration, the notification display becomes easily noticeable to the player, and it is possible to preferably notify that the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4), the display means can display a specific display relating to the advantageous state on the front side of the background image in the second region (5). For example, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, the right-handed display 20SHM, etc. on the front side of the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52). , The characters used for the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display, and characters of a type different from the characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display. , Each type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed (for example, used for a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right-handed display 20SHM. The characters to be used include characters of the same type as those used for the acquired number display 20SHK and acquired number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a type different from the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. Characters of the same type also include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed), and the specific characters used for the specific display cannot see the background image from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are such that the jackpot medium background image cannot be visually recognized from a specific area).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to accurately recognize a specific character even for a specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and is a display means. (For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area. A second display area narrower than one display area is included (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51, and is the first display area 20SH51. The display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, including a second display area 20SH 52, which is narrower than the above). , The image display device 5 can display a big hit medium background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and the background image in the second display area. It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the (for example, the image display device 5 is granted to the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. (The display of the number of winning balls related to the number of prize balls can be displayed, etc.), at least in the first display area, a notification that the amount of game value to be given has reached a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. As a display, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, in the image display device 5, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state reaches the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the background image during the jackpot. As the acquisition number notification display for notifying that the game has been performed, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", and the jackpot game state. When the number of prize balls given in the above reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over", etc.), and the given amount display has a gaming value in the advantageous state. It is updated every time it is given (for example, the number of acquisitions is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), and the notification display is shown in the table. The display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display (for example, the acquired number notification display ends the display when a predetermined period elapses after the display starts), and the notification display The character used for is a character having a size larger than the character used for the given amount display (for example, the character used for the acquisition number notification display is a character having a size larger than the character used for the acquisition number display). The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display). The characters to be used include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed), and the specific character used for the given amount display cannot see the background image from the specific area. Yes (for example, the specific character used for displaying the number of acquisitions is that the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area, etc.), and the specific character used for the notification display is the specific character used for the given amount display. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than that of the character (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display is a character than the specific character used for the acquisition number display. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is small, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display and the notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state, he / she confirms the amount of grant, but the amount of grant is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area. , If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, It is possible to accurately recognize a specific character.

(7) In the game machine of the above (6), the character used for the notification display is a three-dimensional character (for example, the character used for the acquisition number notification display is a three-dimensional character, etc.), and the three-dimensional character is used. The area of the line to be formed may include an area for expressing a character and an area for expressing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine according to (6) or (7), the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display). The background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in the advantageous state like the grant amount display, but when the grant amount of the game value given in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount, the game is played. It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the person, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Because the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, not only can the risk of misidentifying the character be suppressed, but also the background image can be visually recognized from a specific area of the specific character, which has a directing effect. Can be enhanced.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (6) or (7), the background image of the specific character used for the notification display is invisible from the specific area (for example, the acquisition number notification display in the modification 1). The specific characters used in the above may be such that the background image during the jackpot is invisible from the specific area 20SHI4).

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquired number display, but the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the player when it is done, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area with respect to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the ratio of the size of the characters is small, not only can the discomfort be suppressed even if the background image cannot be seen from the specific area of the specific character, but also the background image cannot be seen from the specific area of the specific character. Can be prevented from being misunderstood.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above, the display means can change the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 is the number of acquisitions. The notification display 20SHKH can be stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period elapses after the mode of the notification display changes to the specific mode, the mode of the notification display is displayed. The acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out when a predetermined period elapses after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51. Things, etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the game machine of the above (10), in the character used for the notification display, the area of the line forming the character is displayed in a plurality of kinds of colors (for example, a modification relating to the second form of the feature portion 20SH). The character used for the acquired number notification display in 2 is that the area of the line forming the character is displayed in a gradation of three colors, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of types of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 displays the mode of the characters used for the acquired number notification display in a display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → Display mode G → display mode A → ..., which is changed over time, etc.), and the notification display is displayed in a mode different from that of the specific mode. The speed at which the combination of the plurality of types of colors changes differs depending on whether or not the combination is used (for example, when the acquired number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquired number notification display is stopped. The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs depending on whether or not is moving (frame-in / frame-out)).

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the notification display, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state capable of advancing the game faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine 1). The display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the image display device 5 and the like), the display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the image display device 5 and the like). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device). The display area 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51). The background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 has the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. , ST background image can be displayed, etc.), and in the second display area, the variation number display regarding the variation number in the special state can be displayed on the front side of the background image (for example, an image display device). In the second display area 20SH52, the remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST times in the probabilistic state can be displayed on the front side of the background image during ST), at least in the first display area. On the front side of the background image, the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the number of fluctuations is a predetermined value, and the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the number of fluctuations is the first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display for notifying the number of fluctuations when the value of the number of fluctuations display becomes a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 has at least the first number. 1 In the display area 20SH51, when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the background image during ST, it is indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST as the remaining number of times notification display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times. The remaining number notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times is 60, and the remaining number notification display 20SHST that notifies "50" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is 50 times. , Etc.), the variable number display is changed every time the variable display is executed. New (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed, etc.), and the number notification display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed). For example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display), and the characters used for the number of times notification display are larger than the characters used for the fluctuation number of times display. It is a large-sized character (for example, the character used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHST is a character of a size larger than the character used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, etc.), and is used for the fluctuation number of times display and the number of times notification display. The characters used include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are surrounded by the lines forming the characters. The background image of the specific character used for displaying the number of fluctuations is invisible from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for displaying the remaining number of times 20SHST is a specific area). The specific characters used for the number-of-times notification display are visible from the specific area (for example, the background image during ST is invisible from 20SHI6) (for example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH). The specific character is characterized in that the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7).

According to such a configuration, the variation number display including the specific character and the number notification display can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of fluctuations in the special state, the number of fluctuations is displayed, but the number of fluctuations is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area, and the number of fluctuations is displayed from the specific area of the specific character. When the background image is visible, the specific character may look different from the original character. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character is recognized accurately. be able to. In addition, the number of times notification display is not always displayed like the number of fluctuations display, but is limited to a specific period in the sense of alerting the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the number of fluctuations display will be a predetermined number of times. Since it is displayed and is displayed in large size characters in a wide first display area, by making the background image visible from a specific area of the specific character, in a conspicuous display position called the first display area, It is possible to show the background image as much as possible.

(13) In the game machine of the above (12), the display means can display the characters used for the number-of-times notification display in a transparent mode in which the image on the back surface can be seen through the area of the line forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back surface can be seen through the line portion forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be visually recognized while the number-of-times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily stressed.

(14) In the gaming machine of the above (13), the first display area includes a variable display area in which the identification information is variably displayed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 is “left”, “middle”, Each of the "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.), the display means can display the number-of-times notification display on the front side of the identification information in the variable display area (for example,). , The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the identification information can be visually recognized while the number-of-times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily stressed.

(15) In the gaming machine of the above (14), when the identification information is recognizable, the display means displays the number-of-times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 is variable). When the display result of the display is derived and displayed, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is recognizable when the number-of-times notification display is displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In any of the game machines (12) to (15), the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the grant amount display. , The acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls can be displayed, etc.), and the number-of-times notification display is displayed in a display area different from the display area in which the grant amount display is displayed (for example, image display). The device 5 displays the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the imparted amount display from being lowered due to the display of the number-of-times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). The display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 and the like), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and around the first display area. The area includes a second display area that is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51. The second display area 20SH52, which is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, and the like), the display means has advanced the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 corresponds to the progress of the round game in the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The background image during the jackpot can be displayed (for example, the background image can be displayed), and at least in the first display area, the second background image corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the second background image). In the first display area 20SH51, the ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state can be displayed, etc.), and when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the said A specific suggestion video that suggests the progress of the game can be displayed on the front side of the first background video (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in the second display area 20SH52 when the ending background video is not displayed. , The effect video 20SH of the notice of the pachinko machine on hold, which suggests that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state in response to the stored hold information, can be displayed on the front side of the background video during the big hit, etc.), In the second display area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the first background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the grant amount display in the second display area 20SH52. On the front side of the background image during the jackpot, it is possible to display 20 SHK of the number of winning balls related to the number of prize balls given), and when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area. Notifying the front side of the second background image of the amount of gaming value granted in the advantageous state. The result notification display can be displayed (for example, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 gives the ending background image to the front side of the ending background image in a jackpot game state at least in the first display area 20SH51. The result display 20SHRE for notifying the total number of prize balls has been displayed (for example, the result display 20SHRE can be displayed), and the characters used for the result notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example,). The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the grant amount display and the result notification display are based on the lines forming the characters. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include the specific characters in which the enclosed specific area is formed (for example, the characters used in the result display 20SHRE include the specific characters in which the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters is formed. Etc.), the first background image and the previous term specific suggestion image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area as the specific character used for the given amount display (for example, the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK is the specific area. (The background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SHRE of the notice of the pending villa are invisible, etc.), and the specific characters used for the result notification display are the second background image visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific character used in the result display 20SHRE is such that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5).

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestion image, and the result notification display including the specific characters can be displayed with the second background image. It can be preferably displayed in relation to each other. For example, when the player confirms the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state, he / she confirms the amount of grant, but the amount of grant is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area and is specified. Since it may overlap with the suggestion video, if the first background video or the specific suggestion video is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. By making the background image during the big hit and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area of the above, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion image. Therefore, by making the second background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, the result notification display can be visually recognized. It is possible to show the second background image as much as possible in a conspicuous display position called the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of the above (17), a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability). It is possible to set any one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6"), and the display means suggests a setting value set by the setting means. The second background image can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background image in a mode that suggests the set value), and the specific suggestion image is It is one aspect of a plurality of types of suggestion images that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect image 20SHRE of the pending villa notice announces the jackpot reliability. Although it is one of multiple types of notice effects, the setting suggestion effect due to the pending villa notice is not executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the set value is suggested by the second background image, so that it is significant that the second background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the result notification display. Will increase.

(19) In the gaming machine according to (17) or (18), the display means starts displaying the second background image at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 has an ending background at a predetermined brightness. At the timing of starting the display of the result notification display, the second background image is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the specific brightness is displayed. The result notification display is displayed with a lightness brighter than the lightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses the ending background image at a specific lightness darker than a predetermined lightness at the timing T3 at which the display of the result display 20SHRE is started. Display the result display 20SHRE at a brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result notification display can be improved.

(Explanation of feature 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature unit 19SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-1 to 15-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the feature unit 19SH is scheduled to display the number of winning balls given by the game ball entering the big winning opening in the big hit game state and to give it in the big hit game state. It is possible to display the number of planned acquisitions and the total number of prize balls. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the number of planned acquisitions invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the planned acquisition number display when the planned acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over-winning effect before the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature unit 19SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Direction operation when a prize occurs during a round game)
FIG. 15-1 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a prize is generated during a round game. FIG. 15-2 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 15-1 (A), the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment displays the number of acquisitions 20SHK when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state, and the game ball is a big prize opening in the big hit game state. 20SHK1 for displaying the number of prize balls given by entering the box, and 20SHK2 for displaying the total number of winning balls scheduled to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 15-1 (A), the acquired number display 20SHK is such that the acquired number display 20SHK is "135" in the numerator with the central convoluted line "/" separated, as in "135/1500". It is arranged and displayed in the form of a fraction in which "1500" is arranged and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is arranged. That is, in the acquired number display 20SHK shown in FIG. 15-1 (A), the number of prize balls given when the game ball enters the big winning opening in the big hit game state is 135 balls, and the prize ball is given in the big hit game state. It shows that the total number of prize balls to be awarded is 1500.

Further, also in this embodiment, the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, and the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, and the round number display 20SHR are displayed in the second display area 20SH52. , Right-handed display 20SHM is also displayed. Further, the image display device 5 displays a background image during the jackpot in which the character 20SHCA appears in response to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 15-2, the big hit medium background image is displayed on the display layer arranged on the back side of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed.

When the prize ball is given by the game ball entering the big winning opening in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions according to the effect mode as shown in FIGS. 15-1 (B) to 15-1 (F). Update the value of 20SHK.

When the prize ball is given by the game ball entering the big prize opening in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 first forms the big winning opening as shown in FIG. 15-1 (B). The display of the effect display is started in the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 when viewed from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 15-1 (B), the effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-1 (C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. In the example shown in FIG. 15-1 (C), since the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display is started is displayed at the lower right end of the display area. Moving upwards in the area. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15-1 (C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases with movement. Even at this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-1 (D), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. Here, as shown in FIG. 15-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on the display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible, but as shown in FIG. 15-2 (D), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-1 (D), the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible due to the movement of the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it cannot be done. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK may be difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-1 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 15-2 (D) to (E), the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. As a result, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the large winning opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15-1 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 15-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-1 (F), the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF. In the example shown in FIG. 15-1 (F), since the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, and it can be confirmed that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 has been updated. can.

According to such an effect mode, the effect display 20SHEF can be first noticed by displaying the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. At that time, it is possible to preferably recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 that has been attracting attention has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over-winning occurs)
FIG. 15-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an over-winning occurs. FIG. 15-4 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that when the tenth game ball enters the large winning opening in one round game, the large winning opening is closed. At this time, 11 A so-called over-winning may occur in which the first gaming ball enters the large winning opening following the tenth gaming ball. When an over-winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the acquired number display 20SHK according to the effect mode as shown in FIG. 15-3.

When an over-winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 first forms a large winning opening as shown in FIGS. 15-3 (A) to (B), as in the case where the tenth winning is generated. The display of the effect display is started in the display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), the effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. In the example shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), since the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display is started is displayed at the lower right end of the display area. Moving upwards in the area. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases with movement. Even at this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number display 20SHK by the effect display 20SHEF before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. Before it becomes invisible or difficult, an over-winning effect for notifying that an over-winning has occurred is started. In the example shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the over-winning effect video in which the character CHCB appears is displayed on the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by another effect device as an over-winning effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs an over-winning sound in a mode different from the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the over-winning effect. In the example shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the over-winning sound with the "picone picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emitting mode different from the normal sound at the time of winning as an over-winning effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (D), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. Here, as shown in FIG. 15-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on the display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible, but as shown in FIG. 15-4 (D), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-3 (D), the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible due to the movement of the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it cannot be done. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK may be difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 15-4 (D) to (E), the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. As a result, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in FIGS. 15-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 15-4 (D) to (E), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquired number is displayed. The value of 20SHK2 has been updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF as shown in FIG. 15-3 (F). In the example shown in FIG. 15-3 (F), the acquired number display 20SHK is visible because the effect display 20SHEF is finished, and the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. You can confirm that.

According to such an effect mode, the effect display 20SHEF can be first noticed by displaying the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to be seen by the effect display 20SHEF, by updating the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquired number. When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to preferably recognize that the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, which have been attracting attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the planned winning number display 20SHK2 is updated, so that the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state is given by the over-winning. It is possible to preferably recognize that the number of prize balls has increased by the number of prize balls.

After finishing the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over-winning effect as shown in FIG. 15-3 (G). In the example shown in FIG. 15-3 (G), the display of the over-winning effect image displayed on the image display device 5 as the over-winning effect is finished, and the background image during the big hit in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Suggestion of setting by over winning production)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the jackpot winning probability is changed by using the display result determination table according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", with "1" having the lowest ball output rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The larger the value in the order of, the higher the ball output rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is, the larger the value is in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low setting", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high setting".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the set value can be changed, and the above-mentioned over-winning effect can be executed as the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value. For example, when the setting value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over-winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 15-5 (A), and displays the “picone”. The over-winning sound with "picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the set value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays the over-winning effect image in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The over-winning sound with "Pee Po" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect by the over-winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the set value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, the over-winning effect of the mode shown in FIG. 15-5 (B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, or when the set value is set high. In addition, the over-winning effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 15-5 (A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

Further, the over-winning effect may be different depending on whether the set value "6" is the most advantageous for the player and the set value is not "6". Further, the over-winning effect may be different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number.

(When there are rounds where the specified number of prizes have not been won and rounds where over prizes have occurred)
FIG. 14-6 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when there are a round in which a predetermined number of prizes have not been won and a round in which an over prize has occurred in the feature unit 19SH.

As described above, the open state of the jackpot game state is continued until the elapsed timing of the predetermined period or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches the predetermined number, whichever is earlier. ..

In the examples shown in FIGS. 15-6 (A) to (B), although there were 9 prizes in the round game of 1 round, before the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have passed, the 1-round round game is completed and the 2-round round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (B), the number of acquisitions displayed as "135/1500", 20SHK, is displayed in response to the fact that nine prizes were won during the round game of one round. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the round game of 10 rounds is executed is 1500.

Then, in the two-round round game, the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached ten, the two-round round game was completed, and even in the three-round round game, there were ten prizes. And. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls have been awarded in the round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 15-6 (C).

Then, it is assumed that an over prize has occurred in the round game of 3 rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over-winning effect is executed when the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult, but when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquired number display is displayed. The value of 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, in the round games of 4 rounds to 10 rounds, it is assumed that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches 10 and the round games of each round are completed. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 15-6 (G).

Then, when the round game of all 10 rounds is completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 15-6 (H), and the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state is 1500 by the result display 20SH. Is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the 10-round round game is executed was 1500, but the over-winning occurred in the 3-round round game, so that the final prize was obtained. The value of 20SHK2, which is the number of planned acquisitions, is "1515". However, since there were only nine prizes in the round game of one round, the value of the final number display 20SHK1 is "1500" instead of "1515".

According to such an embodiment, when there are a round in which a predetermined number of prizes has not been won and a round in which an over-winning has occurred, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is smaller than the value of the planned number of acquired number display 20SHK2. By confirming the final number of winnings display 20SHK, it is easy to understand that there were rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and there were rounds in which over-winning occurred.

FIG. 14-7 is a diagram showing another example of the effect operation when there are a round in which a predetermined number of prizes have not been won and a round in which an over prize has occurred in the feature unit 19SH.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 15-7 (A) to (B), although there were 9 prizes in the round game of 1 round, before the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have passed, the 1-round round game is completed and the 2-round round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (B), the number of acquisitions displayed as "135/1500", 20SHK, is displayed in response to the fact that nine prizes were won during the round game of one round. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the round game of 10 rounds is executed is 1500.

Then, in the two-round round game, the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached ten, the two-round round game was completed, and even in the three-round round game, there were ten prizes. And. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls have been awarded in the round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 15-7 (C).

Then, it is assumed that an over prize has occurred in the round game of 3 rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over-winning effect is executed when the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult, but when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquired number display is displayed. The value of 20SHK1 is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains "1500".

Then, in the round games of 4 rounds to 10 rounds, it is assumed that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches 10 and the round games of each round are completed. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 15-7 (G).

Then, when the round game of all 10 rounds is completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 15-7 (H), and the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state is 1500 by the result display 20SH. Is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the 10-round round game is executed is 1500, but the over-winning occurs in the 3-round round game. However, the value of the final planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only nine prizes in the round game of one round, the value of the final number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to such an embodiment, when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes has not been won and a round in which an over-winning has occurred, there is no sense of discomfort due to the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2. be able to.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 19SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball is easy to win and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed to the closed state when controlled to the big hit game state. .. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-winning effect when an over-winning occurs in one round game. Then, the image display device 5 displays 20 SHK1 for displaying the number of prize balls given by the game ball entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and the acquisition for the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state. It is possible to display the planned number display 20SHK2. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the effect display 20SHEF that makes the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to be seen by the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over-winning effect before the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, a sense of incongruity occurs when the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, as compared with the case where the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is visible. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect by the image display device 5 and the effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over-winning effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the over-winning effect.

Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect. The 20SHEF is moved to make the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the fact that the game ball has entered the special variable winning device 7 can be expressed by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the interest can be improved. Further, since the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 but also the acquisition number display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of discomfort.

Further, as described above, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 naturally come into view. Therefore, due to the attention paid to the effect display 20SHEF, it is possible to pay attention to the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in the state before the value is updated.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over-winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquired number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that an over-winning has occurred by executing the over-winning effect, so that a sense of incongruity may occur when the planned number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any of a plurality of types of set values "1" to "6" having different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner of suggesting the set set value.

With such a configuration, attention can be raised to the over-winning effect.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over-winning effect after the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed.

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 can be visually recognized while the over-winning effect continues, so that a sense of incongruity caused by the update of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2. Can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modification example of feature 19SH)
The gaming machine related to the feature unit 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, by executing such a power supply stop processing, the CPU 103 can play the game before the power failure after the power failure is restored. You can continue.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not back up various data for advancing the effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 cannot continue the effect based on the game information before the power failure after the power failure is restored.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like during the round game, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power failure is restored. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in the round game after the power failure is restored, or concretely such as "??? / ????" The acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed in a mode in which the value is not displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game even if a prize is generated in the round game after the power failure is restored. .. On the other hand, if it is possible to identify that the over-winning has occurred in the one-round round game after the power failure is restored, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the over-winning effect by the image display device 5, while the speakers 8L and 8R And the attacker lamp 9c can be used to produce an over-winning effect. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that an over-winning has occurred, for example, by an effect control command that notifies that the over-winning has occurred.

According to such a configuration, in a situation where the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power failure is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed so that a sense of incongruity does not occur. On the other hand, if an over-winning occurs, it is possible to notify that fact.

(Explanation of means related to feature 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.) and is displayed. Variable means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 or the like), a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win, and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. The winning means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball is easy to win and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, etc.). When controlled to the advantageous state, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state (for example, pachinko). The gaming machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed to the closed state when controlled to the jackpot gaming state). , A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when more game media than a predetermined number win the variable winning means in the one round game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a one round game. The display means is provided by the gaming medium winning the variable winning means, etc.). It is possible to display a first grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value and a second grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value to be granted in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display the second grant amount display. , 20SHK1 indicating the number of winning balls given by the game ball entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and 20SHK2 displaying the number of expected winning balls related to the total number of winning balls scheduled to be given in the jackpot game state. When more than the predetermined number of gaming media wins the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second grant amount display invisible or difficult (for example, displayable). The image display device 5 can display the effect display 20SHEF that makes the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs), and the second grant amount display is visually recognized by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the value of the second grant amount display is updated (for example, the image display device 5 is an effect table. (For example, updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult by the display 20SHEF), the specific effect executing means displays the second grant amount by the specific display. The specific effect is started before it becomes invisible or difficult (the effect control CPU 120 starts an over-winning effect before the expected number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult by the effect display 20SHEF, etc.). , Characterized by.

According to such a configuration, a sense of incongruity occurs when the value of the second grant amount display is updated, as compared with the case where the value of the second grant amount display is updated while the second grant amount display is visible. Can be suppressed.

(2) The gaming machine of the above (1) includes audio output means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the specific effect executing means is described as the specific effect. It is possible to execute an effect by the display means and an effect by the audio output means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as an over-winning effect. Being feasible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the specific effect.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display invisible or difficult (for example, in the image display device 5, the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7). At that time, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. Things etc.).

According to such a configuration, the fact that the game ball has entered the variable winning means can be expressed by the display effect in the display means, and the interest can be improved. Further, since not only the second grant amount display but also the first grant amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of the above (3), the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult (for example, in the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, the effect display 20SHEF is moving. Sometimes it is visible, and when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are displayed, the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are naturally visible. Therefore, due to the attention to the specific display, it is possible to pay attention to the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display in the state before the value is updated.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), the specific effect executing means said the specific display before reaching the display area where the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are displayed. Start a specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts an over-winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed). ..

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that more game media than a predetermined number have won the variable winning means by executing the specific effect, so that the second grant amount display is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of discomfort at the time.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means (for example, a pachinko game) capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player. The machine 1 includes a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" having different jackpot winning probabilities), and the specific effect executing means is the setting. The specific effect can be executed in a manner suggesting a set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 can execute an over-winning effect in a manner suggesting a set value set, etc.). ..

With such a configuration, attention to a specific effect can be increased.

(7) In the gaming machine of the above (5), the specific effect executing means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display is completed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF. After finishing, ending the over-winning production, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the second grant amount display can be visually recognized while the specific effect is continued, so that a sense of incongruity due to the update of the second grant amount display can be felt. , Can be suppressed more effectively.

(Another example of transition to a time saving state)
Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and each modification, the mode in which the transition to the time saving state is always performed via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is operated is illustrated. , The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the time saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time saving state may be shifted without operating the special variable winning ball device 7.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the out-of-time symbols or a part of the small hit symbols.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a missed symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if a time-saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of a transition to the time-saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time-savings will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Are the same. However, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery of time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the timing at the time of winning a prize at the starting port is set. good.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time saving symbol is drawn, the lottery result by the dedicated random number is used as the winning value when the dedicated random number is used, and when the small hit symbol random number is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the specific small hit symbol is used. When the random number value is used as the winning value and the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A time saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be the winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, in the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number of the time saving state is not changed depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the time-saving symbol lottery uses the missing symbol random number, the specific missing symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performance other than the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, so that the set value can be changed only if it cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be the timing after the jackpot determination. It should be noted that the lottery of the time-saving symbols is not executed in the time-saving state or the high-probability time regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, and is executed only in the low-probability low-base state. However, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving state is already set, it may be determined for each gaming machine regardless of whether the time-saving number of times is reset or the lottery is not performed.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time reduction can be made different for each time reduction symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the derivation lottery for the time-saving end symbol may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times after the time reduction start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine controlled to a high-probability low-base state for a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high-probability low-base state is set when the game hall is opened, and the high-probability low-base state is the specified number of times. After the variable display of is executed and finished, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

1… Pachinko game machine 5… Image display device 9… Game effect lamp 9B1… Lever lamp 9B2… Button lamp 9C… Upper frame lamp 9M… Left frame lamp 9N… Right frame lamp 11… Main board 12… Production control board 31A… Stick Controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU
131… Vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
As the vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect, and a vibration effect executing means.
A light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect, and a light emitting effect executing means.
A specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect according to the progress of the game,
With display means,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect.
The vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area.
The display means
In the first display area and the second display area, the background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed.
In the second display area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the background image.
At least in the first display area, the amount of game value given has reached the first predetermined amount as a notification display on the front side of the background image to notify that the amount of game value has reached a predetermined amount. It is possible to display a first notification display for notifying that and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the second predetermined amount.
The grant amount display is updated every time the game value is granted in the advantageous state.
The notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the display, and the display ends.
The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display.
The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed.
The background image of the specific character used for the given amount display is invisible from the specific area, and the specific character is invisible.
As for the specific characters used in the notification display, the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images